JP6743765B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end surface (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-80625, A

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a variety of image display modes by a light guide member.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction. When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident from the light emitting means to the light guide member partially travels as weak light or travels, or a light guide means for guiding light including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel,
The light guide means shines more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Which guides light from the light emitting means ,
The light guide member is provided with a flat surface portion provided with the predetermined end portion, and a pattern which is provided at a position farther from the predetermined end portion than the flat surface portion and which is capable of emitting light by the light output from the light emitting means. Has a curved portion,
It is characterized in that the pattern provided on the curved portion can emit light by the light output from the light emitting means .

Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2,
A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction. When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions and travels in the light guide member, and the light in each separated direction emits light weaker than the light, or the light. A light guide means configured to form a region that is out of reach ,
The light guide member is provided with a flat surface portion provided with the predetermined end portion, and a pattern which is provided at a position farther from the predetermined end portion than the flat surface portion and which is capable of emitting light by the light output from the light emitting means. Has a curved portion,
It is characterized in that the pattern provided on the curved portion can emit light by the light output from the light emitting means .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a variety of image display modes by the light guide member.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in still another open state Pachinko machine front view Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of the game board Back side perspective view of a pachinko machine Rear view of a pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Time chart for explaining the time when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of the decorative pattern Schematic diagram showing screen transition of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. A schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. A schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device according to the time chart of FIG. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state, b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the pending full tank production in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. Time chart for explaining suggestive production cancel function The schematic diagram which shows the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment used as an own machine, and another pachinko machine communicatively connected with the said pachinko machine. A screen diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative pattern display device when the selection operation device is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the reservation full tank production in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. The figure explaining an example for making it easy to increase the number of times the right to hold a unit game relating to a special symbol is increased. Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment (A) is a front view of the reel device, (b) is a front view of the middle reel Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device The schematic diagram which shows the transition of the display by the reel device in the case where the 2nd sub-symbol sign warning is given. The schematic diagram which shows the transition of the display by the reel device in the case where the 2nd sub-symbol sign warning is given. Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the countdown notice is given (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device in the game board, (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration of the game board taken along the line AA of FIG. 30(a). 30A is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device taken along the line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. 30B illustrates a group of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. Front view for (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices in the game board of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CC of FIG. 32(a), 32C is a top view of FIG. 32A viewed from the upper side, and FIG. 32D is the vicinity of the information display part when a player who is playing a pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment obliquely looks at the lower left direction. Figure showing the appearance of (A) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified sectional view of the reel device taken along the line D-D of FIG. 33(a), and (c) is a front view of the gaming machine. Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in the vertical direction at a position approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and the wave lamp. (A) is a front view of the reel device in the case where the display area of each symbol row by three reels is a basic display area, (b) is a reduced display area of each symbol row by three reels A front view of the reel device in the case of a display area, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol array, (d) is a reduced display area of the symbol array Top view of the reel device schematically showing the reeled state Exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the eleventh embodiment as seen from the front side. Disassembled perspective view of the drum base seen from the front side Perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the front side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side (A) is a schematic diagram explaining the advancing direction of the light which injected into the lower end surface in a light guide plate, (b) is a front view of a light guide plate which shows an example of how to shine.

Regarding the embodiment of the game machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of game machine, will be described, and then a modification and other kinds of game machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be sequentially described.

<Structural composition>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Showing. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and these parts are relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting unit that supports the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in a game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable component, but the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is removed. The support mechanism for supporting and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body part may be provided in the island facility.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation front end side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, at an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101 supports the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 from below, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. When the plug is inserted, it is configured to be rotatable. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detaching operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. In contrast, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined detaching operation of opening the intermediate block 103 by a certain amount or more with respect to the outer frame 101 and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. It As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the middle block 103, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap with each other, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are separated by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detaching operation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed by an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 143, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to the leftward rotation operation on the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is disengaged from the movable portion 144, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism that restricts opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. The rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism allows the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 to switch between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

The rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism is configured by, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, two opening/closing restriction parts 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing restriction part 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. The three opening/closing restriction units 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change a state of engagement with an opening portion arranged so as to overlap front and rear in a closed state of the rear block 104 due to a rotation operation, whereby an open/close prohibited posture corresponding to the open/close prohibited state. And an opening/closing allowable posture corresponding to the opening/closing allowed state can be switched. When all the turning pieces 151A to 151C are set in the opening/closing permitted postures, the respective turning pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 is brought into the opening/closing permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open/close prohibited posture and the open/close permitted posture may be switched between the open/close prohibited state and the open/close permitted state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and is configured to rotate only at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three turning pieces 151A to 151C, two turning pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open/close prohibited state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotation piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotation pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permissible postures only by the operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, and thus, the crime prevention performance is achieved. Has been increased.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism that restricts the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow-down restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction change section 162 provided in the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restriction piece 161 is in a movement-allowed state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, the restriction. The changing portion 162 pushes the intermediate block 103 toward the rear side thereof. The flow-down restricting piece 161 is arranged rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is in the open state), the pressing of the flow-down restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing portion 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow-down control piece 161 is set in a movement prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102 side. The flow-down restriction piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and blocks the flow of the game ball to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in rear view). An open/closed detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block is provided is provided, and as shown in FIG. An open/close detection switch 109 is provided for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103.

Next, the configurations of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be sequentially described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of functional parts are attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front surface side of the base frame 201, a front decoration 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that includes the front view central portion of the front block 102. It has been installed. In the state where the base frame 201 that constitutes the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210</b>A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range except the outer peripheral portion where the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, It is provided with an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing the game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by the player for firing the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, in the front block 102, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a portion that protrudes forward on the lower side of the opening 210A. Upper protrusion 217, a lower protrusion 218 that is located below the upper protrusion 217 and protrudes forward, and an upper protrusion 217 and a lower protrusion that are on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is formed in a substantially flat region located on the far side of 218 and in which the firing operation device 250 is disposed, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 includes, for example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmissive member fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. Front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted on the rear side of the panel frame 221 in a substantially parallel manner with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. The main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, a storage portion 231, a ball removing mechanism (not shown), and a ball removing operation member 232 that operates the ball removing mechanism. In the storage portion 231, an inlet 231A for allowing a game ball to flow from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage portion 231, and an outlet (not shown) for causing the game ball to flow from the storage portion 231 into the pachinko machine 100, A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outflow port is provided. By opening this discharge port, the game balls are discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

The game ball acquired according to the progress of the game and the game ball lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. In addition, the storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and through this opening portion, a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted, or a game ball that is rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage portion 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the outlet are formed (the upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, the pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member 232 is performing the ball removing operation, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage part 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) of the game ball and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1), and the discharge port 241B. A ball removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 and a ball removing operation member 242 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 are provided. The game balls and the like acquired in accordance with the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage part 231 is full, it flows into the storage part 241 through the inflow port 241A. In addition, even in response to the ball-removing operation on the ball-removing operation member 232, the game ball flows into the reservoir 241 from the reservoir 231 through the inflow port 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage portion 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge opening 241B is opened by a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept in the open state until a returning operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removing operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) that detects whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and a firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotationally operated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at a strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing operation is invalidated by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launch device 330.

Further, behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper center edge portion 211A, an upper left edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper center edge portion 211A, and an upper left edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D located below 211B and a right side edge portion 211E located below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission is performed corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper central frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge part 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge part 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right side edge part 211C. The device 273, the left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and the right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E are configured. Each of the frame light-emitting devices 271-275 is a light-emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light-emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. And a printed circuit board.

In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 5, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G are provided above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and the upper left acoustic output port 211F is provided. A left upper acoustic device 281 and a right upper acoustic device 282 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 10) are provided corresponding to the respective upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be positioned at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper protrusion 217. The gaming ball lending device 290 is a frequency display device 291 for displaying a numerical value corresponding to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side on the pachinko machine 100, and lending a gaming ball. It includes a lending operation device 292 that is operated by the player when receiving the money, and a return operation device 293 that is operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted in the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and the numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated along with the renting of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, an equivalent of a banknote corresponding to the balance or a card recording the balance is returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation different from the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up/down/left/right direction operation. With these operation devices 261-263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and the light amount of each device that executes the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute information setting operation, etc. that enables the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be performed by the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. It is said that.

For example, although details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). To do. The "indication effect" is an effect that suggests the degree of ease (or degree of expectation) of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The input operation unit with which the player touches in the input operation device 260 (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit drive unit such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that the operation such as the vibration is configured to be executable by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10 )), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effect accompanied by the input operation, such as positively prompting the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104, a function of bringing the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and the base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the main control unit 370, a launching unit 330 (see FIG. 3) for ejecting, a main control unit 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in a centralized manner. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effect and status notification.

In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the plurality of wirings inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting device 271 to 271). 275, the upper left audio device 281 and the upper right audio device 282) and the devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 or the rear block 104 for electrical connection. The signal relay device 311 including the wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 is a flat plate-shaped base body 401 having through holes through which game balls such as a discharge port 401A can pass forward and backward, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base body 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that curves smoothly from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. The attached recoil prevention member 405 is provided. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball shot from a launching device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel, and returns to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property for preventing a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is formed of a material such as a vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion of the front block 102 on the rear surface side. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 in the direction of the launching path 401B, and the launching device 330 launches it but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling within the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is defined by the outer rails 402 and the inner rails 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220 into a substantially planar shape, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launch device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). ), a firing mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) that drives the firing mechanism 333, and a game ball that is fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing path 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

As shown in FIG. 4, main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a two-part structure that houses main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thereby, not only the back side (front surface side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back surface side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 on the game board 400. It can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main controller 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main controller 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for housing the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a light-transmissive board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, a flow-down change member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow-down direction or flow-down speed of a game ball, and a center located approximately in the center of the base body 401. The structure 420, the middle start winning device 431 arranged on the lower side with respect to the central structure 420, and the starting device according to the second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 (specifically The right start winning device 432), the big winning devices 433, 434 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434) arranged below the right starting winning device 432, and the right start. A starting device 436 related to a normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the winning device 432, and on the upper right side of the game board 400 and arranged on the upper side (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433, 434. The winning combination operating device 435 and the general winning award devices 439A and 439B arranged on the left and right sides of the middle starting award device 431 are provided.

The middle starting prize device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting prize device 431A and the right middle starting prize device 431B) are integrated. The left middle starting winning device 431A is a starting device relating to the first special symbol, and the right middle starting winning device 431B is a starting device relating to a second special symbol similar to the right starting winning device 432. That is, the medium starting winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device relating to the first special symbol and a starting device relating to the second special symbol.

The middle-start prize device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes the game balls that have entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle-start prize device 431A or the right middle-start prize device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured such that every time a game ball enters from the entrance 611, the winning devices 431A and 431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched. As a result, the game balls that have entered the middle start winning device 431 basically enter alternately to the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B.

In addition, the middle-start prize device 431 does not cause a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 to enter any of the middle-start prize devices 431A and 431B, and has a very low probability of being on the right side or the left side of the middle-start prize device 431. It has a function of discharging onto the game board 400 from the opening formed in the. The probability that the game ball that has entered through the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the starting winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned left-side middle starting winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), corresponding to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle-start prize switch (left-side middle start prize switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the left-side middle start prize device 431A, a middle-start prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right-center start prize device 431B (right-side middle) Start prize switch 441B), right start prize switch 442 that detects the game ball that has entered the right start prize device 432, lower large prize switch 443 that detects the game ball that entered the lower major prize device 433, and upper major prize device 434. Upper prize winning switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered, winning combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning combination operation device 435, start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the starting device 436, lower prize A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433. A specific passage switch 448 for detecting a game ball, a general winning switch 449A, 449B for detecting a game ball entering each of the general winning devices 439A, 439B, etc. are installed on the game board 400.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors to prevent fraud (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, etc. are installed on the game board 400.

The central structure body 420 and the entrance part of the game ball of the starting device 436 constitute a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Game balls of each winning device, specifically, the left middle starting winning device 431A, the right middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the above constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls that have entered into each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a recovery and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. Further, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collecting and discharging passage through the discharging port 401A provided at the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game ball guided to the collecting and discharging passage is discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulating device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, and like the middle starting winning device 431, two or more winning devices (for example, the left middle starting winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device 431A). The winning device may be configured by a device in which 431B) is integrated. Further, the starting device such as the left middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game balls are not paid back to the game area again. It may be used as a ball entrance to be discharged.

Each of the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B does not change the entry probability of the game ball into them, and guides the entered game ball to the back side of the base 401. The middle-start prize device 431 does not change the entry probability to the entrance 611, but as described above, a part of the game balls that have entered the middle-start prize device 431 is placed on either of the left-right middle-start prize devices 431A and 431B. Is not discharged (that is, is not guided to the back side of the base 401) and is discharged onto the game board 400 (that is, a game area).

Further, the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism that changes the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device relating to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to it, the starting device relating to the first special symbol, a general winning device. 439A, 439B, may be provided in any or a plurality of winning devices such as the medium starting winning device 431 including the starting device according to the first special symbol and the starting device according to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right starting prize winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is a right entry regulation mechanism 452 that changes the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the right entry regulation mechanism. And a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces that are driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 462, and when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the two movable pieces are the entrance (the winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed), the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces have their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by arranging such that the space between the parts is enlarged. The right-entry restricting mechanism 452 is the right-entry when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is selected by a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") based on the fact that the starting switch 446 detects the game ball. In response to the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the approaching attitude is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower-large prize winning apparatus 433 has a lower-entry restricting mechanism 453 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside by a transition between the allowable-entry attitude and the prohibited-entry attitude, and the lower-entry restriction. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453, and the transition between the non-guided posture and the guided posture to move the game ball that has entered the lower-large prize winning device 433 to the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the distribution mechanism to switch the destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower big prize device 433 is in the entry prohibited posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning hole), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower big prize device 433. In the case where the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize winning apparatus 433. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning apparatus 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in the non-guided posture that projects forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in the guided posture that retracts backward. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided for diversifying the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given a favorable game state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning apparatus 434 has an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside thereof by the transition between the entry permitted posture and the entry prohibited posture, and the upper entry regulation. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibited posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning hole) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper special winning apparatus 434, but the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. In the case of the entry permission posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning apparatus 434.

In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibited posture as a mechanism for changing the entering probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452, etc., each mechanism is configured to form a winning opening (or a ball entrance) of each device. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I wish I had it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and the entry of the game ball is allowed even in the normal state, In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, a lottery based on a game ball that has entered the left-side middle starting prize device 431A related to the first special symbol being detected by the left-side middle starting prize winning switch 441A (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"). Or if the game ball that has entered the right-side middle start winning prize device 431B or the right-start winning prize device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-side middle-start prize switch 441B or the right-start prize switch 442. When the lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry permitted posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time has passed from the shift of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 to the approaching allowable posture, and switches after a predetermined time from the shift to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The winning combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434 to start operating. After winning the big hit lottery, one of the lower big prize winning device 433 and the upper big prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 has passed. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. In addition, it is not always necessary that either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts the operation on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operation device 435 has passed, and instead of that, or In addition, one of the lower-winning prize device 433 and the upper-winning prize device 434 may be configured to start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times games are held. A display device having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are preliminarily divided into light emitting areas corresponding to the respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, with the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is variably displayed, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. With the special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol and the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is variably displayed, or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game related to the first special symbol is held, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game related to the second special symbol is held A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are respectively reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a one-time game executed based on one start prize, and a lottery determination based on the lottery determination based on the start/win determination based on one start prize. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left middle starting prize winning device 431A is detected by the left middle starting winning prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Also, the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right middle starting prize winning device 431B or the right starting prize winning device 432 is the right middle starting prize winning switch 441B (Fig. 10) or the right start winning award switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol are the number of holding times depending on the combination of the light emitting states (lighting off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units. indicate.

Further, in the game board 400, with the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol is variably displayed, or the normal symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol is related. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the right to hold a unit game is held is provided. The right to the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, the design is expressed by the light emitting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol holding display device 478 displays the number of holding times by a combination of the light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to be overlapped behind the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and final display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variation display and confirmation display of the decorative symbol are not always changed at the same timing, or the display is stopped as the confirmation display. There is no need to set it, and it may be set so that a slight time difference is provided at each timing and the fluctuation starts at substantially the same timing and the confirmation display is performed at substantially the same timing.

In addition, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Various light effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Correspond.

If you win the big hit in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the variation display time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter, "time saving state" , And the winning state of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state") is a gaming state ( In the following, also referred to as "time saving game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, it is a time saving state, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “high-probability state”), a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability variation gaming state”).

The time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter, it returns to the normal game state. In addition, the probability variation game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to have the above-mentioned configuration, and for example, the high-probability state may be continued until the next big hit, or the above-mentioned game state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a game state different from each of the above-mentioned game states may be further included, and a configuration in which the game states are shifted depending on a condition different from the above-described condition may be adopted.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number related to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, various variation pattern random numbers are generated, and various game states. In the case where the game ball that has entered the left-side middle starting winning device 431A, which is the starting device related to the first special symbol, is detected by the left-side middle starting winning award switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the starting winning of the first special symbol is achieved. At the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number, the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the right of the unit game relating to the symbol is not reserved, it is started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved , After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is obtained based on the starting prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the present starting prize after the special game state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the right of the unit game related to the two special symbols is not reserved, it is started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved , After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the present starting prize is started. When each random number is acquired based on the starting winning of the second special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the starting winning of this time after the special gaming state. It is started after the unit game relating to the special symbol.

That is, the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of starting winning. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to have a configuration in which the unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the winning prize, and one of the special symbols is executed in preference to the other special symbol. Alternatively, for example, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol may be executed in preference to the unit game relating to the first special symbol. That is, during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the starting prize of the first special symbol is obtained, and if the starting prize of the second special symbol is subsequently obtained, the starting prize is obtained later. The unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol may be preferentially executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be simultaneously variable.

When the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, in addition, based on the obtained jackpot symbol random number, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery ( The type of jackpot pattern) is determined. The type of this stop symbol corresponds to the type of jackpot, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, or A plurality of types of big hits are set corresponding to the types of game states such as the game state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state) after the special game state, and a big hit symbol is set for each type. When the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current game state, lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the first special The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. The variation pattern of the decorative design is roughly classified into a variation pattern in which the reach display is performed before the decorative design corresponding to the stop design (big hit design or lost design) related to the first special design is confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, “reach design”. (Also referred to as "variation pattern") and a variation pattern in which the reach display is not performed before the decorative design corresponding to the case where the stop design related to the first special design is the lost design is confirmed.

In addition, the "reach display" means that the variable display of the decorative symbol in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, and then is fixedly displayed in the left and right display areas of the decorative symbol display device 479 first. The display result when the remaining decorative design is confirmed and displayed, in which some combinations corresponding to the combination of decorative designs are a big hit, and the variable display continues in the central display area (that is, This is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the stop pattern).

The reach display includes a normal reach that is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds) and a reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). Super reach and is included. It should be noted that the types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including a special reach which is a reach display having a variable display time longer than that of super reach.

The reach variation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Note that only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When multiple types of normal reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of super reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

After the variable display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected, the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decoration in the decorative symbol display device 479. The variable display of symbols (variation effect) is started, and in the first special symbol, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the variable display time, and in the decorative pattern, the variable pattern over the variable display time. The variable display according to is continued. Then, with the passage of the variable display time, the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

If the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the fixed display of the first special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state. In the special game state, the lower entrance control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning apparatus 433 and the upper entrance restriction mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning apparatus 434 are allowed to enter a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443, 444 in each of the entry allowable postures of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454, or a prescribed maximum. When the allowed entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibited posture. After that, after the passage of a predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permitted posture again. This approach restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

Only one of the lower approach regulation mechanism 453 and the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 is allowed to enter the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) ), one of them moves to the first approach allowable posture. In addition, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed from the final return to the entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed after that (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the state shifts to the time saving game state or the probability variation game state.

In various game states, the game ball that has entered the right-side middle start winning device 431B or the right-start winning device 432 which is the starting device related to the second special symbol is the right-side middle-start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right-start winning switch. When it is detected by 442 (see FIG. 10), the second winning symbol is a starting prize. The control of the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol described above. That is, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number relating to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. To be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variable display, and the transition control of the game state, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. To be done.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not retained up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, the data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal symbol, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already-acquired normal symbol ends.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the winning random number, and if it is won, a predetermined hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variation display time, and in the time saving state. The variable display is continued in a fixed pattern for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permissible posture at least once. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving game state and probability variation game state), a predetermined maximum allowable entry time that is longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times), the state shifts to the entry permission posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start prize switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. In addition, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current regular symbol is completed even if the number of times of transition to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number.

Next, the configuration relating to the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

In order to receive the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as "right special symbol lottery") based on the start winning to the right start winning device 432, first, in the ordinary symbol lottery Of course, the game ball must enter the right starting prize winning device 432 in the entry permitted state of the right starting prize winning device 432 based on the winning. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the right start winning device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning probability in the normal gaming state. Since 0.1 second) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds), in the normal game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right special symbol lottery , Per unit time that can receive the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, these lottery may be referred to as "central side special symbol lottery") based on the start winning to the medium start winning a prize device 431 It is much smaller than the opportunity. On the contrary, in the time saving state such as the time saving game state or the probability variation game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the central side special symbol lottery. ing.

Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the center side special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, aims to shift to the probability variation game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the right special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, in the game board 400, a central structure 420 is provided at the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) of allowing a game ball to flow down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 are selectively configured. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed playing technique, and in the time saving game state and the probability variation gaming state, the player plays the game by the right-handed playing technique. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, a game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base body 501. The base block 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported by the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and the game balls tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section for guiding a game ball flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of the game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 that rents out game balls, and a guide as a ball guide portion that guides the game balls flowing out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game balls and the lending of the game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply/launch control device 570 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the launch of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operating device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. The game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 are provided.

The base body 501 is integrally molded of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front portion and a protective cover portion 503 located rearward of the base portion 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, to which other devices are attached. It has a function as an attached part.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but covers a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103, such as a part of the main control device 370, which needs frequent inspection and confirmation, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window portion for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of vent holes 503A having a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the heat generation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the game ball tank 510 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from a ball circulating device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 gently inclines in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined also in the direction (front-back direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, on the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width that allows the game balls to pass in a row, and the height gradually increases as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. Is provided with a rectifying member 522 that has a top surface portion that lowers and gradually rectifies the game balls that flow down the passage from a vertically overlapping height to a one-step height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the opposite side of the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically long so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and game balls from the tank rail 520 flow in. The case rail 530 is curved downward to the left and right so as not to forcefully flow the game balls, and continues downward. In addition, a ball out detection unit 539 for detecting ball out is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built in the out-of-ball detection unit 539, and the storage ball switch 591 causes a ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or on the upstream side thereof so that a game ball is stored in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are attached so as to overlap with the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned on the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of unsealing, like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a substrate case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply/launch control device 570 includes a power supply/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a substrate case that houses the power/launch control board 900. The power/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. And is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply/launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that, in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, these major control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

The power supply/launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the drawing), and a firing device according to an operation of the firing operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the drive of 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 V) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal electric power (for example, DC 24 V), and generates various electric power from the internal electric power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is electric power of a drive voltage (for example, DC 12 V) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. It includes power for a control voltage (for example, DC 5 V) for controlling the power supply, power for a backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various kinds of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power monitoring board 910 is supplied with power of internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. Electric power of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these electric powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Electric power of a drive voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage. Electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the acquisition of external power is stopped. Note that the power switch 909 is turned off, or the power plug (not shown) connected to the power source unit 901 via the power switch 909 is pulled out from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so as to return to the current control state.

The firing control unit 902 cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330. The ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that it is not operated. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay section 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, and thereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input aiming at a section where a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, the low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed). The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 which has received the high speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 supplies power between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920, and transmits various signals, and a power supply monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply state from the power/fire control board 900. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power source unit 901. When the state in which the voltage is less than 22 V continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power is in a power failure state, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 integrally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. RAM (not shown) for storing the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown), etc. are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (backup) the internal data by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls a payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a payout operation of the game balls by the payout apparatus 540 according to an operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with other devices, and for example, bidirectional information input/output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Is connected to the open/close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. Like the RAM of the main control board 920, the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the above, the internal data may not be maintained in the power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like, based on an instruction from the main control board 920. The sub control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connecting means for connecting to another device so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are bidirectionally connected for information communication, and the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like are connected only for one-way information output communication.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when a power failure state is recovered and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). The timer interrupt processing is performed.

First, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initial setting processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. , After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, and the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) related to the special symbol and the normal symbol A random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the RAM), and a first fluctuation type counter for determining a fluctuation display time (fluctuation time), a fluctuation pattern, etc. The fluctuation counter updating process S1022 for updating the value of the fourth fluctuation type counter (a part of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request is issued before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 that sets an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. A startup standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub control board 940, and the like stand up is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, a determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/launch control board 900, a determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and a storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not to delete the stored information in the RAM. Here, the saved information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power outage, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power outage, and is executed. The value of the counter regarding the unit game in the inside, the value of the counter stored by the starting winning, and the like are illustrated.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. ), it is determined whether the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the 2's complement of the checksum value, is “0” (determination processing S1007), and the current checksum value It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not the predetermined power failure value indicating that the saving information has been saved and completed at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saving When the information is not normally retained (S1007:N), the RAM clear processing S1008 of erasing the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the storage information is normally stored (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clearing process S1008 is executed, a hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920. Wear initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 of determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010:N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (recovery command Output process S1012). The control state of the main control board 920 is returned to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state by the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010:Y), various information is initialized without restoring the retained information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM restoration setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error statuses such as fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure status. Even if occurs, all of those error states are canceled. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 which have received the return command or the initialization command. Also in each of the above, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

After the initial setting (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014) of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device was operating at the time of the transition to the previous power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state is executed in the sub control board 940. It

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state flag is set or not to determine whether it is the time saving state or the non-time saving state (determination process S1016), which is the time saving state. In this case (S1016:Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016:N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors is sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various types of main processing will be individually described.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output status of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined to be the power failure state. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power outage, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that there is a power outage, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM restoration setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as progress of games and monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. It Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each processing of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulation initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter relating to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter relating to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the special value is changed. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Also for the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values to those counters, the winning random number initial related to the special symbol It is updated as in the case of the value counter.

In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the first fluctuation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to these counters. To be done.

In addition, the winning random number counter, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selecting counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the above counter may be configured as another configuration. For example, the configuration may be such that the initial value counter is not used to update from a fixed initial value, or the configuration may be configured using a random number generation IC without using a program and referencing the value as necessary. ..

In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the game stop value is updated and various kinds of information for stopping the progress of the game are set. On the other hand, if the injustice detection information is not the injustice detection value or is already the game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various fraud occurrences are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol Normally, signals for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 are output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach regulation solenoid 462, a lower approach regulation solenoid 463, an upper approach regulation solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are operated. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the medium start prize winning switches 441A and 441B, the right start prize winning switch 442, the lower prize winning switch 443, the upper prize winning switch 444, the winning combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specifying The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals and the signals from the various switches are read. For each of the following, a signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) A change in the detection state of each switch is detected based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined to be the on state transition. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the ON state of various switches is immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even if it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, and fraud monitoring are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various prize winning devices or forcibly operating various prize winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the admission allowable posture, and the game balls are guided to a specific passage of the lower big winning device 433 by vibration. , Induction of forced malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 by radio waves, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, left middle starting winning device 431A, Occurrence of a situation in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding a game ball to the right middle starting prize winning device 431B, the right starting winning prize device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 at an abnormal timing is performed. To detect.

In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, in the case where the medium start prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the left middle starting prize winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle starting prize winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right start prize switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper big prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10). When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the special winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the firing control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launching device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). It is detected whether (see 3) is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, a prize is awarded to the main control board 920 every time the control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, three) corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). When the ball command is requested and the payout of the prize balls is continued, the main control board 920 outputs a further prize ball command. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated corresponding to a prize (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is paid out. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower big prize device The operation control of 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the various variation pattern random numbers. The value is selected based on the number of times the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is held.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the suspension control of the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Also, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device The operation control of 433 and the special winning apparatus 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the various variation pattern random numbers. The value is selected based on the number of times the right to hold the unit game relating to the second special symbol is held.

In the normal symbol related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the special symbol holding display device 476 relating to the first special symbol, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 or the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is combined. The combined output data is output to each device in the next control signal output process S1208 based on the timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to the respective information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 on the decorative symbol display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Indicative production that appears in variable display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 is a predetermined reach display (for example, In the case of a mode including a super reach, it is configured such that a predetermined suggestion effect can be brought out by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

With reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, a description will be given of suggestive effects that appear in variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the time when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, in FIG. 13, as an example of the variable display in which the suggestive effect can appear, a variable display including a super reach with a variable display time of 90 seconds is illustrated. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 479 along the time chart of FIG. 13, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 13, at time ts, when the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 479, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol. Will start scrolling. The display data forming the variable display of the decorative pattern is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940 in association with each fluctuation pattern command that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative design includes a design in the left column (hereinafter also referred to as “left design”), a design in the right column (hereinafter also referred to as “right design”), and a left design. It is composed of three rows of symbols including the symbol between the right symbol and the symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "middle symbol"). In the example shown in FIG. 13, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are assumed to have started the variable display of the decorative symbols that were stopped at “6”, “5”, and “3”, respectively.

A predetermined time period (for example, 4 seconds later) after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at time ts, the first operable period is started (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t2). The first operable period from the time t1 to the time t2 is a period in which the player can perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261. It should be noted that the time t2 does not necessarily have to be a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period ends at the timing when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261. The display corresponding to the operation may be performed, and even in the other operable periods described below, each operable period is ended at the timing when the pushing operation is performed, and the effect display corresponding to the operation is displayed. You may start.

When the first operable period starts at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 479 that variably displays decorative symbols indicates that the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed. An image 601 reminiscent of FIG. 6 and a character 602 “Enemy has come!” are displayed as a comment on the production that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

Each display data related to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the start time (that is, the time of day) of the first operable period is controlled by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at t1) and is erased at the end time of the period (that is, time t2).

When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period, as illustrated in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts. At the timing of (after), of the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol stops (time t4).
On the other hand, when the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 during the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect that is one of the suggested effects starts. .. As shown in FIG. 14, three types of pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C are prepared as the first special effect, and the first of the one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect is started at time t2 by the control of the sub control board 940.

The pattern 1A is a pattern including a character 611A such as "The army has arrived!" and a red frame (red frame) 612A surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 1B is a pattern including a character 611B such as "A thief has come!" and a yellow frame (yellow frame) 612B surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 1C is a pattern including a character 611C such as "A cat came!" and a blue frame (blue frame) 612C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. Each display data related to the display of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. The combination of the character and the frame does not have to be set to be the same each time, and the character and the frame may be selected by lottery.

The lottery of which one of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “first special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the first special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the first special effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and then the first special effect concerned. It is performed by referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and at the update timing, the value of the counter is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "99"). In this case, the value is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

When the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special effect by the first special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the first operable period starts or ends.

As the first special effect selection table, the first hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed, , A first out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first hit time table and the first out-of-time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (ie, The variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being confirmed and displayed), and when the pattern 1C appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern that is currently being displayed is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely.

Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 611A "The army of XX has come!" included in the pattern 1A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the "cat" included in the pattern 1C is included. When the character 611C that says "I came!" is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is the lowest.

Similarly, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern when the first special effect appears. That is, when the player sees the pattern 1A in which the frame 612A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the player sees the pattern 1C in which the frame 612C is blue, the special game state. Have the lowest expectations for.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the first hit time table, the pattern 1A has the highest selection probability (for example, 60%), the pattern 1B has the second highest selection probability (for example, 20%), and the pattern 1C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 10%). On the other hand, in the first out-of-range table, the selection probability of pattern 1C is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the selection probability of pattern 1A is the lowest. (For example, 10%) is set.

As illustrated in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the first special effect (time t3). The first special effect (Pattern 1A, Pattern 1B, Pattern 1C) is displayed on a layer in front of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. Therefore, when the first special effect ends at time t3, the execution is performed. The variable display of the decorative pattern inside appears again. Then, at time t4, the left symbol stops.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period starts (low time t5) during the low-speed fluctuation (scroll) before the right symbol stops. The first operable period started at time t5 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t6). The second operable period from the time t5 to the time t6 is a period in which the player can perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, the decorative pattern display device 479 displays an image 603 that reminds the player that the pushing operation device 261 can be pushed. Is displayed. The display data related to the display of the image 603 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the decoration is performed at the start time of the second operable period (that is, time t5) by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the symbol display device 479 and is erased at the end time of the period (that is, time t6).

When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, as illustrated in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time ts. At the timing of (after), the right symbol that scrolls at low speed (low speed fluctuation) is stopped so that the reach display is displayed (time t7). For example, in the configuration where the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the left symbol is “as shown in FIG. When it is stopped at "7", the reach display is generated by stopping at the right symbol at "7" at time t7.

On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is the sub-control board. It is started by the control of 940. As the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 15, four types of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D are prepared, and one of these four types is selected. The second special effect of the pattern is started at time t6.

The pattern 2D is a pattern in which the right symbol scrolling at a low speed is stopped so as to reach the display, as in the case where the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period.

As shown in FIG. 15, the pattern 2C starts moving again (display Q1) after being temporarily stopped so that the right pattern that scrolls at a low speed becomes the reach display, and shifts only one from "7" where the right pattern becomes the reach display. Stops at "8" (display Q2), and the middle symbol is short and temporarily stopped (display Q3). When a series of displays Q consisting of these displays Q1 to Q3 is displayed, the symbols in the left and right middle three columns are re-scrolled. The symbols in each column to be re-scrolled are stopped so that the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at the time t4, and then the right symbol undergoes low speed scrolling to reach display. That is, the pattern 2C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated twice.

The pattern 2B is the same as the pattern 2C up to the part where the right symbol scrolls slowly in the re-scrolled three columns of symbols. In pattern 2B, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the right and left middle three columns start re-scrolling for the second time. The symbols in the respective columns in which the re-scrolling is started for the second time are stopped so that the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol undergoes the low-speed scroll to reach the display. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated three times.

The pattern 2A is the same as the pattern 2B up to the part where the right symbol scrolls slowly in the second re-scrolling. In the pattern 2A, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the right and left middle three columns start the re-scrolling for the third time. The symbols in the respective columns in which the re-scrolling is started for the third time are stopped so that the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol undergoes the low-speed scroll to reach the reach display. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated four times.

In addition, regarding the pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C) for performing continuous production in the second special production, a frame of each color surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 appears during production. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears in the display Q3 (that is, the display in which the middle symbol is short and is temporarily stopped) forming the series of displays Q.

On the other hand, in the pattern 2B, the blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the first series of displays Q, and the yellow frame appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the second series of displays Q. To do. That is, a frame of a different color appears in the series of displays Q performed for the first time and the series of displays Q performed for the second time.

In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 that constitutes the second series of displays Q. A red frame appears in the display Q3 forming the series of displays Q performed the third time. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of displays Q performed the first time, the series of displays Q performed the second time, and the series of displays Q performed the third time. In Pattern 2A, a rainbow (rainbow color) frame may appear before the right symbol stops after the third re-scrolling. In this case, the variable display is a big hit. Correspondingly, it is set to always transit to the special game state after the variable display.

The display data relating to the above-described pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C display is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. For the pattern 2D, the display data that constitutes the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being executed is diverted.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, the pattern 2C, and the pattern 2D is selected as the second special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the second special effect selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and the second special effect concerned. It is performed by referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The second special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Note that a counter that is common to the above-described first special effect selection counter may be used as the second special effect selection counter.

When the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special effect by the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the second operable period starts or ends.

As the second special effect selection table, the second hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed, The second out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D) in the second hit time table and the second out-of-time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the final display), and when pattern 2D appears, transition to the special game state after the decorative pattern that is currently displayed in variable display is confirmed. Is set to be the least likely. The patterns 2B and 2C are set to have the second highest probability and the third highest probability, respectively.

Therefore, as the second special effect, when the pattern 2A for performing continuous effect as if the variable display is simulated four times appears, the player maximizes the degree of expectation for the special game state. When the pattern 2D that is the reach display without the continuous effect is displayed despite the operation of the press operation device 261, the player makes the lowest expectations.

Further, in the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, and the pattern 2C that perform the continuous effect among the second special effects, the frames (frames 613C, 613B1, and 613A1, etc.) surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 are surrounded. ) Will appear. The number of times the color of the frame changes in each pattern is four times in pattern 2A, twice in pattern 2B, and once in pattern 2C, so that the player can change the color of the frame each time. Improves expectations for special gaming states.

Furthermore, the change in the color of the frame in the patterns 2A, 2B, and 2C is likely to transition to the special game state, as in each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C) forming the first special effect. It is configured to change in the order of blue→yellow→red as it gets higher. That is, in the second special effect, the order of changing the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing continuous effect has a certain regularity with the possibility of transitioning to the special game state. Is configured to be. Therefore, the player synergistically increases the degree of expectation for the special game state as the color of the frame sequentially changes according to the regularity.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the second hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 2A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the second highest (for example, 30%), and the pattern 2C. Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 8%) and the pattern 2D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 2%). On the other hand, in the second out-of-range table, the selection probability of pattern 2D is highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of pattern 2C is second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of pattern 2B is third. It is set to be high (for example, 10%) and the selection probability of the pattern 2A is lowest (for example, 2%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect ends by stopping so that the right symbol becomes the reach display after a predetermined time from the start of the second special effect (time t10). In addition, in FIG. 13, only one time is shown as the time t10 which is the end time of the second special effect, but the execution time of the second special effect is different for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern). 2D), the four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special effect can be time t10.

For example, in the pattern 2D, the time t7, which is the stop time of the right symbol when the player does not perform the pushing operation on the press operation device 261, during the second operable period becomes the time t10. On the other hand, in the pattern 2A, for example, the timing 60 seconds after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts is time t10. Further, in each of the patterns 2B and 2C, for example, the timing 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the time ts is the time t10.

The execution time of the second special effect may correspond to the preselected variable display time. For example, re-scrolling may be performed corresponding to each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D). The variable display having a longer variable display time may be selected as the number of times is larger, and the pattern may be determined by determining the number of re-scrolls by the variable display time being determined by the main control board 920. .. Further, the length of the effect (battle effect) executed after the right symbol is stopped is changed, and the timing of the right symbol stop in the first time and the second time and thereafter is the same in each pattern, and the length is different corresponding to each pattern. It may be configured to execute the Sano production.

At time t7 or at time t10 after the end of the second special effect, when the right symbol stops in the reach display, the third operable period starts. The third operable period ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t8 or time t11). The third operable period is a period in which the player can perform a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

When the third operable period is started by stopping the right symbol in the reach display, as shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 479 has a push operation for the push operation device 261. An image 605 that reminds the person and a character 606 of “Recruiting helper!” are displayed as a comment on the production that prompts a pushing operation on the press operation device 261.

Each display data relating to the display of the image 605 and the characters 606 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the decorative symbol display is performed at the start time of the third operable period by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the device 479 and is deleted at the end of the period.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether the player has operated the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. The battle effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started by the control of the sub control board 940. Similarly, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, regardless of whether or not the player has operated the press operation device 261 during the third operable period, The battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

The battle effect is an image effect in which a character that is regarded as an enemy such as a XX army, a thief, or a cat and a battle situation are displayed until the middle symbol finally stops. As shown in FIG. 16, as battle productions, four types of patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D are prepared, and one of the four patterns selected from these four types is prepared. The battle effect starts at time t8 or time t11.

The pattern 4A is a pattern showing a state of fighting against the enemy in an overwhelmingly priority situation. The pattern 4B is a pattern showing that the enemy is fighting in a priority situation. The pattern 4C is a pattern showing a state of fighting against the enemy in a situation inferior to the enemy. The pattern 4D is a pattern showing a state of fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation to the enemy.

Display data relating to the display of the patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D may have a configuration in which only display data corresponding to the video effect showing the situation of each battle is prepared, or can appear in the first special effect. It is also possible to have a configuration in which display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video effects indicating the battle situation are prepared for each type of enemy.

In addition, each pattern 4A, 4B, 4C is a pattern of a long production time used when the right symbol is stopped at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed at the second operation time). , A short effect time pattern used when stopped at time t10 after the end of the second special effect (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). On the other hand, regarding the pattern 4D, the time when the right symbol stops is the same regardless of whether or not the second special effect is performed (that is, whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). Therefore, there is prepared one effect time pattern that is shared by the case where the press operation device 261 is pressed and not operated during the second operation time.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is selected as the battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the battle effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the battle effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and compares the value with the battle effect selection counter. , By referring to the battle effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

The battle effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the value of the counter is changed to a value that is larger than the current value by “1” and is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a counter that is common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter and the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

The timing when the sub control board 940 selects the battle effect pattern by the battle effect lottery is the timing when the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is currently being executed. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

As the battle effect selection table, the fourth hit time table that is referred to when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed, A fourth out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, pattern 4D) in the fourth hit time table and the fourth out-of-time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 4A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state (after being confirmed and displayed), and if the pattern 4D appears, transition to the special gaming state after the decorative pattern currently displayed in variation is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely. Further, regarding the patterns 4B and 4C, the possibility is set to the second highest and the third highest, respectively.

Therefore, when the pattern 4A that performs a video effect showing that the enemy is overwhelmingly prioritized as the battle effect appears, the player maximizes the expectation for the special game state. Then, when the pattern 4D for performing the video effect showing that the player is fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation against the enemy appears, the player makes the lowest expectations.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the fourth hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 4A is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4B is second highest (for example, 15%), and the pattern 4C. Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 5%), and the pattern 4D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 0%). On the other hand, in the fourth out-of-range table, the selection probability of the pattern 4D is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4C is second highest (for example, 15%), and the selection probability of the pattern 4B is third. It is set to be high (for example, 4%) and the selection probability of the pattern 4A is lowest (for example, 1%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the battle effect started at time t8 or time t11 is a timing after a predetermined time (90 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 13) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at time ts. Then, the middle symbol is finally stopped by the symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (that is, the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed), and the process ends (time te).

In the configuration where the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the left symbol and the right symbol both stop at "7". If it is, if the first or second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at "7" at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery is not a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than "7" (for example, "8") at time te. Immediately before or at the same time as this stop, the result of the battle effect is also displayed, and if the first or second special symbol lottery is a big hit, an image in which the character on the ally side wins is displayed, and if not won An image is displayed in which the enemy character wins and the teammate loses.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the suggestive effect 1 The third special effect, which is one, is started by the control of the sub control board 940. Similarly, when the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, similarly, when the third operable period ends at time t11, the third special effect starts. It

As the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C are prepared, and the third of one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect is started at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started, but the third special effect is displayed in the image layer in front of the battle effect, so the player has the third special effect. Until the end, the third special effect will be seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The pattern 3A is a pattern including a character 614A such as "A man has come!" and a red frame 615A surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 3B is a pattern including a character 614B "A fighter has come!" and a yellow frame 615B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. The pattern 3C is a pattern including a character 614C such as "A dog came!" and a blue frame 615C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. Each display data related to the display of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940.

The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “third special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the third special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the third special effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and the third special effect concerned. This is performed by referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The third special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). It should be noted that a counter common to at least one of the above-described first special effect selection counter, second special effect selection counter, or battle effect selection counter may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

When the sub control board 940 selects the third special effect pattern by the third special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern that is currently being executed. The timing may be the timing when the third operable period starts or ends.

As the third special effect selection table, the third hit time table that is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol that is currently being executed. A third out-of-miss table that is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the third hit time table and the third out-of-range table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (ie, The variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit.

Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, after the decorative pattern that is currently being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently being variably displayed is It is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the final display), and when pattern 3C appears, transition to the special game state after the decorative pattern that is currently displayed is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely.

Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, when the player sees the character 614A, which says "XX man came!" included in the pattern 3A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the character included in the pattern 3C. When the character 614C "A dog came!" is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is the lowest.

Similarly, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern when the third special effect appears. That is, when the player sees the pattern 3A in which the frame 615A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the player sees the pattern 3C in which the frame 615C is blue, the special game state. Have the lowest expectations for.

In particular, the correlation between the color of the frame of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) forming the third special effect and the possibility of transitioning to the special game state, each pattern forming the first special effect ( Since the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C) are configured in the same manner, the player sensuously determines the degree of expectation of the special game state for the color of the frame in the third special effect from the regularity of the color of the frame. it can.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the third hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 3A is highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is second highest (for example, 25%), and the pattern 3C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 5%). On the other hand, in the third out-of-range table, the selection probability of the pattern 3C is highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 3A is lowest. (For example, 2%) is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or time t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start (time t9 or time t12). Since the third special effect (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) is displayed in a layer in front of the battle effect, the player can finish the third special effect at time t9 or time t12. The battle effect will be seen on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is a mode including the predetermined reach display, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed to perform the predetermined operation. Suggestive production can be revealed.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed in is three times (that is, the first operable period and the second operable period) while the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed once. , And a third operable period), and the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period, so that the suggestive effect (that is, the first special effect, the first special effect, or the first special effect, depending on the time of the operation is performed. The second special effect and the third special effect can be displayed (displayed) on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Therefore, in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods are provided while one variable display is performed, so that the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period The suggestive effect can be displayed in various patterns (more specifically, eight patterns) depending on the presence or absence of an operation.

First, the first pattern causes the first special effect to appear at time t2 by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and starts at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t10. By performing, it is a pattern that causes the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t11.

In the second pattern, the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1 to cause the first special effect to appear at time t2 and the second special effect started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t10. Thus, at time t11, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to appear.

In the third pattern, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the first operable period started at time t1, so that the first special effect appears at time t2, and the second special effect starts at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, This is a pattern for causing the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t8.

In the fourth pattern, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed in the first operable period started at time t1, so that the first special effect appears at time t2, and the second special effect starts at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and the pressing operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. , At the time t8, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to appear.

In the fifth pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is displayed at time t6, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, This is a pattern for displaying the third special effect and the battle effect at time t11.

In the sixth pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is displayed at the time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at the time t10. , At time t11, only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to appear.

The seventh pattern does not cause the second special effect to appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second operation that starts at time t5 is possible. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period that starts at time t7, the time t8 is reached. Is a pattern for displaying the third special effect and the battle effect.

The eighth pattern does not cause the second special effect to appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second operation that starts at time t5 is possible. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, This is a pattern in which only the battle effect is revealed without causing the third special effect to appear at t8.

In this way, when the operable period provided a plurality of times is provided while the variable display is performed once, a plurality of patterns of patterns are selected depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period. The suggestive effect can be displayed with one of the patterns.

As described above, the variable display including the super-reach with the variable display time of 90 seconds has been illustrated as an example of the variable display provided with the operable period of a plurality of times, but in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time. Also in the variable display including a super reach of a length other than 90 seconds, a plurality of operable periods are similarly provided. Regardless of the type of reach display included, a variable display time longer than a predetermined time (variable display including reach display) may be provided with a plurality of operable periods. .. The number of operable periods provided may differ depending on the length of the variable display time. Further, the number of operable periods provided for one variable display may be one.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after a variable display that allows a plurality of suggestive effects to appear, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13, When the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol that was being performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state, including the suggestive effect that can appear during the variable display Configured to restore.

In order to realize such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display capable of producing a plurality of suggestive effects, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13, and supports the variable display. When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit, the stop symbol in each row immediately before the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (for example, the example of FIG. 13) "653"), a lottery result of the first special effect lottery, a lottery result of the second special effect lottery, a lottery result of the third special effect lottery, a lottery result of the battle effect lottery, and a fixed display of the decorative symbol. The stop symbols (for example, “777” in the example of FIG. 13) of each column in are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

These pieces of information (that is, the stop symbol before the variable display of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) are configured to store all of this information at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that one or more pieces of information are stored at each timing at a plurality of timings. The timing for storing the information may be the timing at which the variable display ends (that is, the timing at which the confirmed display is displayed), the timing at which the variable display starts, or each performance lottery It may be the timing to be given.

<Restoration of suggested production in special game state>
In a configuration in which a plurality of suggestive effects appear while one variable display is performed, a suggestive effect that appears later is less likely to transition to a special game state than a suggestive effect that appears earlier. In this case, the player may lose his/her expectation of transitioning from the currently displayed variable display to the special game state and be disappointed in the game. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to intentionally operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period.

However, in some cases, such as when the fixed display of the decorative symbol is a display indicating that the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the player does not cause it to appear at his own will. Sometimes you may want to know what would have happened if the suggested production was revealed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period of the special game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed in the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state, It is configured so that it can be restored including suggestive effects that can appear during variable display.

The configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 17(a) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state. Is. FIG. 17B is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the variable display in which a plurality of suggestive effects can be displayed, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13, is performed, the game state is changed to the special game state. In such a case, of a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) executed in the special gaming state, when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started, before the transition to the special gaming state. As a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of the decorative pattern that has been performed (hereinafter, also referred to as “restore selection screen”), a screen as shown in FIG. 17A is a decorative pattern display. Displayed on device 479.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the restoration selection screen includes a character 621 that informs the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the transition to the special game state can be restored, and a decoration An image 622 that reminds the player that a pressing operation can be performed on the pressing operation device 261 to restore the variable display of the symbols, and a round number display 631 that informs the player of the current round number in the special gaming state. It is configured as a screen displayed on the special game state screen including.

The character 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at the timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, 5 seconds). Will be erased later). That is, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a period from the start of the predetermined round in the special game state to the elapse of a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. Each display data related to the display of the characters 621 and the image 622 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls display and deletion.

When the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 during the period when the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub control board 940 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol that was being performed before the transition to the special gaming state in execution. With respect to each information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (that is, the stop design before the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design of the fixed display of the decorative design, and the lottery result of each effect lottery), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed. , Restoring including suggestive effects that can appear during the variable display.

That is, in the case of the example of FIG. 13 described above, when the variable display of the decorative symbol stopped at “653” is started and the first operable period comes, as shown in FIG. 17B, the image 601 is displayed. And characters 602 are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the stored first special effect lottery is executed.

When the second operable period comes after the left symbol stops at “7”, the image 603 is displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the stored second special effect lottery is executed.

When the third operable period comes after the right symbol stops at "7" so as to reach the display, the image 605 and the character 606 are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated in the third operable period, the third special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the third special effect lottery and the stored lottery result of the battle effect lottery are selected. The battle effect is displayed, and when the variation display time of the variation display being executed (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”. That is, the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed as "777".

On the other hand, when the press operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, the battle effect according to the stored lottery result of the stored battle effect lottery is displayed and executed as in the case where the press operation device 261 is operated. At the timing when the variable display time of the variable display inside has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at "7".

Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed, is restored as described above, the player has an operable period (first operable period) provided three times. , The second operable period, and the third operable period), the pressing operation device 261 is operated to be pushed during the entire operable period or a part of the operable period, so that the first special effect and the second special effect. , Or the third special effect, which one wants to see.

That is, in the variable display of the restored decorative pattern, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the press operation device 261 is operated during the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the special game state. When the player operates the press operation device 261, the player sees the special pattern seen during the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special gaming state even in the variable display of the restored decorative symbol. You can see the performance again.

On the other hand, in the variable display of the restored decorative pattern, an operation corresponding to the operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the special game state is possible. When the player operates the press operation device 261 for the period, the player restores the special effect that was not seen during the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special game state. It can be seen in the variable display of decorative patterns.

Therefore, for example, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, the suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) are provided in eight patterns from the first to the eighth. Special effect, and battle effect) can be displayed, but in the variable display of the restored decorative pattern, the same pattern is displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before the special gaming state. The suggestive effect can be displayed in a pattern, or the suggestive effect can be displayed in a different pattern.

Here, the restoration of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not necessarily have to be the restoration of the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display, and a part of the variable display may be restored, or a start winning is generated. The period during which the variable display is executed a plurality of times from the time when the variable display corresponding to the winning of the big hit is executed may be restored, or the time when the player restores may be selectable.

The restoration selection screen may be displayed a plurality of times during the special gaming state, for example, by displaying the restoration selection screen in the third round and the seventh round in the special gaming state. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be restored a plurality of times during the special game state. By adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the decorative design can be restored multiple times, the player suggests multiple types of patterns different from the pattern that appears in the variable display of the decorative design that was performed before the special gaming state. Can be revealed.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed is restored to the decorative symbol display device 479, the restoration is performed as shown in FIG. 17(b). A round number display 641 indicating the current round number is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the lower right part of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current round number while playing. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940. Instead of displaying the number of rounds display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Hold full production>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are both the maximum number, that is, for both special symbols. When the number of holdings reaches eight in total, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as “holding full tank effect”) appears on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition.

The hold full production may be a production which is executed immediately when the total number of holdings reaches eight, or a variable display is executed for a certain period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times)). Or a special period that continues for a predetermined time (for example, a period of 5 minutes) is started, and the start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479. The effect may be suggested to the player by displaying it or displaying a specific color on the peripheral portion of the display screen. In addition, in the hold full production, a specific sound effect is output at the timing when the number of holdings reaches eight, a specific character that does not appear during a variable display except during a special period appears, or a decorative pattern. Expectation for the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for the suspension every time the suspension display has a specific movement (for example, high speed movement) or the suspension display color is 1 The color indicating the degree (for example, the color of the display section indicating the hold is displayed in blue, yellow, red, and rainbow, and the order of the colors may be the same as the other colors indicating the degree of expectation. It is an effect that is not seen at all or is hardly seen in other situations such as other than the special period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are both the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times). If reached, in all of these hold, the probability of appearance of full reserve production depending on whether or not the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is included Are configured differently.

In more detail, when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, it is held with a higher probability than when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included. It is configured so that a full tank production is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the hold held for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, the reserved full tank effect appears with a probability of 80%. If the symbol lottery does not include the winning hold, the reserved full tank effect is only displayed with a probability of 10%.

The lottery for displaying the reserved full tank effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “held full tank effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the holding full tank production lottery, the sub-control board 940, when the number of each holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times, the holding provided in the sub-control board 940 By acquiring the value of the full tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) and referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the reserved full tank effect counter. Done.

The main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information relating to the number of holdings at a predetermined timing each time the number of holdings for each special symbol changes. The sub control board 940 can determine whether or not each of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number based on the information notified from the main control board 920.

In addition, the main control board 920, for example, at a timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol is increased due to the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol, a predetermined command including information on the number of times of holding of each special symbol (in the following, This command is also referred to as a "hold command") is transmitted to the sub control board 940 to notify the sub control board 940 of information relating to the number of hold times. Further, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the main control board 920 transmits the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol decreases), the main control board 920 sends a fluctuation pattern command including information on the number of times of holding to the sub control board. By transmitting the information to the sub control board 940, the information relating to the number of times of holding is notified to the sub control board 940.

The hold command includes information on the number of times each special symbol is held, as well as information on a lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command from the main control board 920, the information relating to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is associated with the reception order of the hold command (that is, the order in which the start winning is generated) RAM. Is stored in a predetermined area of, and then, when the corresponding hold is exhausted (that is, the held unit game is executed), the information is erased. Based on the information stored in the RAM, the sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. ..

The hold full production effect counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and at the update timing, the value of the counter is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”). Is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

As the hold full tank production selection table, the first table to be referred to when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, and the special symbol lottery during the hold for the maximum number of times A second table is prepared for reference when the pending hold is not included. The first table is set such that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank production is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

The sub-control board 940 executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform the holding full production lottery when the number of holdings for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number. However, when the main control board 920 reaches the maximum number for each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a holding full tank similar to the holding full tank production lottery performed by the sub control board 940. It may be configured to perform the effect lottery. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information to notify when the appearance of the reserved full production is selected in the reserved full production lottery, and the sub-control board 940. Executes the reserved full tank effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period of the special game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which was performed in the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state, is pressed during the variable display. The suggestion effect (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) that can be displayed by operating the operation device 261 is configured to be restored.

Therefore, even when the player does not intentionally operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period provided for the suggestive effect to appear during the variable display of the decorative pattern, The player can later restore and see a suggested effect that has not been seen because the pressing operation device 261 was not operated.

As a result, the player may have negative emotions in the game, such as regret not seeing the suggestive effect that could be seen during the variable display of the decorative pattern Since it is possible to reduce the interest, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol both reach the maximum number The reserved full tank effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition. Therefore, since the player has the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, the motivation for the game is improved.

In particular, when the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, the hold full tank production with a higher probability than when the hold held for the special symbol lottery is not included. Is configured to appear. In other words, in the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, the hold full tank effect is more likely to appear than in the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is not included. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect can create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state. As a result, the progress of the game can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Here, the lottery result of the reserved full production may be suggested to the player by a variable display different from the variable display relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for example, At the timing when the number of holdings, which triggers the lottery for holding full production, reaches the upper limit, a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 (for example, the upper right corner) is circular in a front view in the circumferential direction. Displays a roulette in which fan-shaped areas with "hit" and "miss" are arranged in order, and one of the areas lights up brightly in sequence to perform variable display by roulette effect and hold. Corresponding to the lottery result of the full tank production, finally, the production in which the lighting part is stopped in the area of “win” or “miss” may be executed, and then the reserved full tank production may be executed. .. As a result, it is possible to easily show the player that the reserved full tank effect may be executed.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a function that allows the player to cancel the execution of the second or subsequent suggestive effect among a plurality of suggestive effects that can appear during one variable display (hereinafter, This function is also referred to as a “implication effect canceling function”). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggestive effect canceling function. Note that FIG. 19 exemplifies a case where the player cancels the suggested effect in the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time shown in FIG. 13 is 90 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, and the first special effect is performed in the period from time t2 to time t3. After the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, 1 second after the end of the first special effect). The first cancelable period ends at time ta2, which is a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after) from time ta1.

It should be noted that the first cancelable period may be provided in a period before the second operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the first cancelable period may start at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancel period ends at time t4 when the left symbol stops. Good.

In the first cancellation period, the sub-control board 940 is controlled to inform the player that the subsequent suggestion effect display can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Characters and images are displayed. For example, a character similar to the image 601 is displayed, in which a character indicating a comment is displayed to inform the player that the display of the subsequent suggestion effect can be cancelled, or the player is reminded that the pushing operation device 261 can be pushed. The image is displayed.

When the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancel period, the second operable period and the third operable period do not occur, and when the right symbol stops at the reach display at time t7, The non-battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

The non-battle effect is an effect that is different from the suggestion effects such as the first special effect and the battle effect in that the degree of ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is definitely displayed is not recalled. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introduction video of a character that appears in a suggested effect such as the first special effect that can appear in the variable display, and its display data is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period starts at time t5 on the condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancel period. When the player operates the press operation device 261 during the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special effect is performed during the period from time t6 to time t10, the second special effect is performed. The second cancelable period starts at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the second special effect) within the production execution period. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after) from time ta3.

The second cancelable period may be provided before the third operable period starts. Therefore, for example, the second cancelable period may be started at the time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends) time t10. Alternatively, the second cancellation period may end.

In the second cancel period, similarly to the first cancel period described above, the display of the subsequent suggestive effect is canceled for the player based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 by the control of the sub control board 940. Characters and images that show what you can do are displayed.

When the player performs a pushing operation on the press operation device 261 in the second cancellation period, the third operable period does not occur, and at the time t10, when the right symbol is stopped so as to reach the display, the game is performed in the first cancellation period. The non-battle effect similar to the case where the person performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

It should be noted that the effect time of the non-battle effect started at time t10 by the player operating the press operation device 261 in the second cancel period is the first cancel, except when the second special effect is the pattern 2D. It is shorter than the battle effect started at time t7 due to the player operating the press operation device 261 during the period.

The display data of the battle effect that starts at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period also corresponds to the time t7 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. Like the display data of the battle effect that is started in 1., it is prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

Although not shown in FIG. 19, during the third operable period, the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period, and the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period. Is started at time t7. When the third operable period occurs, at least the battle effect appears as the suggested effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) that can appear during one variation display, Since the player has a function (implication effect cancellation function) that allows the player to cancel execution of the implication effects (second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) from the second time onward, It is possible to suppress a situation indicating that the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is lower than that of the suggestion effect that has appeared earlier. Therefore, the player loses his/her expectation for the occurrence of the special game state due to the contents of the suggestive effect that have appeared later, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated in the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the predetermined suggestion effect is the decorative pattern of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own device. While being displayed on the display device 479, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, a predetermined suggestive effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100. .. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 20 is a pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100A” for convenience), which is its own machine, and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a machine 100 (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100B” for convenience).

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicatively connected to the pachinko machine 100B via a LAN 651. Note that the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B are not limited to being connected to the LAN 651, and may be directly connected by a cable or the like, or may be a wireless connection according to various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

Further, the pachinko machine 100B, which is a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A, may be the pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as on the right side of the pachinko machine 100A, or the game hall ( Of the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the hall), a predetermined pachinko machine 100 designated by the pachinko machine 100A may be used. In addition, the number of the pachinko machines 100B that are communication partners of the pachinko machines 100A may be one or plural.

When the operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pachinko machine 100A, the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is the own device.

On the other hand, when the player performs a directional operation in a predetermined direction (for example, right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period that has occurred in the pachinko machine 100A, it relates to the suggestive effect corresponding to the operable period. The information is transmitted via the LAN 651 to the pachinko machine 100B that is predetermined as a communication partner.

The information transmitted by the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B (information related to the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period) is selected by the pattern selected as the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect lottery in the first embodiment). Information indicating the first special effect pattern). The transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, based on the received information, the suggestive effect of the pattern selected in the pachinko machine 100A, that is, the player presses the press operation device 261 during the operable period. The suggestive effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A in the case of displaying is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B. The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the player presses the press operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect corresponding to the operable period. Can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A which is the player's own machine, and when the player performs a predetermined direction operation on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, the operation is performed. The suggestion effect corresponding to the possible period can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B which is another pachinko machine.

The pachinko machine 100B controls the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B to display a suggestive effect on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100B. A reduced screen of the screen (for example, the screen on which the variable display is performed) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the game is a predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, the screen Displayed in the lower right part of.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A which is the own device. On the other hand, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B.

In this way, the display position of the suggestive effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggestive effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. It becomes possible to add variety to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggested effect is played on the other pachinko machine 100B. It can be seen together with the player, and can have a different interest than when playing the game alone.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the press operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the predetermined suggestion effect is the decorative pattern display device. It is configured to be displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern in 479 is displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 21 is a screen diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pachinko machine 100, the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

On the other hand, when the player performs a direction operation in a predetermined direction (for example, right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, the operation is possible as shown in FIG. The suggestive effect corresponding to the period is displayed in the area 479A on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In contrast to the right area 479A in which the suggestive effect is displayed, the left area 479B is displayed in the case where the player does not operate the press operation device 261 during the operable period (for example, in the first embodiment. (Variable display after one operable period) is displayed.

When the suggestion effect displayed in the right area 479A ends, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be displayed in the left area 479B and nothing may be displayed in the right area 479A, and the continuation of the variable display of the decorative pattern in each of the left and right areas 479A and 479B. May be displayed.

Note that the control related to the above-described display in this embodiment is performed by the sub control board 940.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the press operation device 261 in the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect is the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 479. It is displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display is displayed.

In this way, the display position of the suggestive effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggestive effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. It becomes possible to add variety to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the player, the suggestion effect displayed by operating the selection operation device 263, and the content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when neither the press operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated. And can be seen at the same time, the interest in the game is improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times), all of these In the hold, the appearance probability of the hold full production was different depending on whether or not the hold that was won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) was included.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times) The appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect is configured to differ depending on how many times the arrival is within a predetermined period. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the number of times each of the holding numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in the predetermined period, the occurrence probability of the reserved full tank production increases. Is configured such that there is a portion where Hereinafter, the "predetermined period" is also referred to as a "holding number monitoring period".

For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of times each of the holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number is the first time within a predetermined period, the reserved full tank effect is With the probability of 50%, the reserved full tank effect will appear with a probability of 70% in the case of the second time, and with the probability of 80% in the case of the third time. If it is the fourth and subsequent times, the reserved full tank effect is revealed with a probability of 95%.

Here, when the number of times of each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit over a plurality of times during the predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the reserved full tank production is changed, but also the production contents are different. You may make it the structure made to be able to. The player may be provided with a privilege when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected for a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period, and as the privilege, for example, a plurality of times during the predetermined period. Only when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected, the reserved full tank effect may be executed by an effect using a character that is different for each number of times, or the reserved full tank effect is performed a plurality of times during a predetermined period. When the appearance of the ton effect is selected, it is possible to restore the variable display of the decorative pattern described above during the special game state thereafter, and the number of times the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected during the predetermined period is The number of restorations may increase as the number increases. As a result, even if the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is once selected and the reserved full tank effect is executed, the player is allowed to continue playing the game so that the number of times of suspension reaches the upper limit again during a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the player is distracted by the reserved full tank production, interrupts the game, and the operation of the gaming machine is reduced.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the holding count monitoring period is a starting point at the time when each holding count for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a maximum number at a certain time, and all of these holding numbers are held. It is a period until it is exhausted (that is, until the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is played the maximum number of times).

It should be noted that, from the starting point, the period until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is played a predetermined number of times greater than or less than the maximum number may be set as the number-of-holds monitoring period, or predetermined from the starting point. The period until the lapse of the determined time may be set as the hold count monitoring period. In addition, as a starting point of the number-of-holds monitoring period, not only the time when each number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number, a predetermined time (for example, 0 minutes every hour) Alternatively, it may be the time when the player gives an instruction by a predetermined method.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold full tank production lottery is the same as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the sub-control board 940, the maximum number of times each holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is maximum. When the number of times is reached, the value of the reserved full tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940 is acquired, and the value of the reserved full tank effect counter of the sub control board 940 is acquired. It is performed by referring to the reserved full production effect selection table prepared in the ROM.

As the hold full production effect selection table of the present embodiment, it is referred to when it is the first time in the holding frequency monitoring period that the number of holding times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number. A first table, a second table referred to in the case of the second time, a third table referred to in the case of the third time, and a fourth table referred to in the case of the fourth time or later are prepared.

The first table is set such that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50% as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also predetermined. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect is set to be selected with the determined probability (for example, the probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). Similarly, the third table and the fourth table are set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

The sub-control board 940 has a period flag (a partial area of the RAM) set when the holding count monitoring period is in progress, and the respective holding counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the holding count monitoring period. Each of them is provided with an arrival counter (a partial area of the RAM) that counts the maximum number of times and a remaining period counter (a partial area of the RAM) that counts the remaining period of the pending count monitoring period. The initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are “0”.

The sub-control board 940 sets the period flag and sets the arrival counter to 1 when the number of times of holding for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in the state where the period flag is not set. In addition, the total of the upper limit values of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, "8") is set in the remaining period counter. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the first table, performs the reserved full tank effect lottery, and executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected.

The sub-control board 940, in a state where the period flag is set, when each of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number, the increment counter is incremented by 1 Subtract one. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter in the reserved full tank effect selection table to perform the reserved full tank effect lottery, and when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected. Perform the hold full production.

Further, when the value of the remaining period counter becomes “0” by updating the remaining period counter, the sub control board 940 determines that the hold count monitoring period has ended, cancels the setting of the period flag, and reaches the arrival counter. The initial value "0" is set to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform the reserved full tank production lottery, but the main control board 920 holds the same reserve full tank production lottery performed by the sub-control board 940. It may be configured to perform a full production lottery. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information to notify when the appearance of the reserved full production is selected in the reserved full production lottery, and the sub-control board 940. Executes the reserved full tank effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holding times), the arrival is predetermined. It is configured such that the appearance probability of the reserved full tank production is different depending on how many times it has reached within the period.

Therefore, within the predetermined period, when the number of holdings for each special symbol reaches the upper limit again, the suggestive effect is more likely to appear than when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit before that, so the player With the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, it is possible to face a game in which a game ball is shot aiming at entering the starting device for each special symbol. This can improve the player's willingness to play.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, it is easy to increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (easy to store the hold). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

In the special game state, since the number of times of holding the unit game relating to the special symbol tends to reach the upper limit due to the game ball shot during the special game state, when the reach display appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol, The player who sees it stops firing the game ball so as not to increase the number of holdings before the occurrence of the special game state (that is, during the variable display) in consideration of the fact that the special game state will occur thereafter. There are many cases. That is, the appearance of the reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol can be one of the reasons why the holding of the unit game related to the special symbol is difficult to increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the decorative symbol display device 479 (that is, the sub-control board 940 is the main In the case of receiving a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display including the reach display from the control board 920), when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is configured so that, with a predetermined probability, a variable display that includes the same variable display time (variation time) as the selected variable display but does not include the reach display (that is, complete loss variation display) is executed multiple times. To be done.

For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart showing an example of variable display including reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. In the variable display including the reach display, when the right symbol stops and the reach display occurs, the player tends to stop the firing of the game ball for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops thereafter.

On the other hand, FIG. 23B is a time chart showing an example of the complete loss variation display. The variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variable display time of the complete loss variable display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

FIG. 23C is a time chart showing a variable display having a variable display time of 60 seconds, which is composed of a complete loss variable display having a variable display time of 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23C, by repeating the complete loss variation display shown in FIG. 23B three times, the same variation display time as the variation display including the reach display shown in FIG. Second) variable display is configured.

In addition, for each of the variable displays including the reach display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, it is necessary to select the complete-delay variable display to configure the variable display having the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display. The information that defines whether to combine in this way is prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 940. Based on the information, the sub-control board 940 configures the variable display by combining the target complete-miss variation display so that the variation display time is the same as the variation display including the reach display.

On the other hand, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed in the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol lottery is won in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Even if there is no pending hold, as with the case where there is a pending win in the special symbol lottery, with a certain probability, the same variation display time as the selected variation display, complete loss variation display multiple times A variable display including is configured to be executed.

However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability that the variable display including the complete loss variation display for a plurality of times is executed is that the special symbol lottery is won during the suspension for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The case where there is a hold is higher than the case where there is no hold that is winning the special symbol lottery during the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “non-reach mode lottery”) whether or not to execute the variable display including the complete loss variable display for a plurality of times is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the sub control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation display including a reach display from the main control board 920, the selection counter (provided on the sub control board 940 ( This is performed by acquiring the value of a partial area of the RAM) and referring to the selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the value of the counter is changed to a value that is larger than the current value by “1” and is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

As the selection table, the first table to be referred to when there is a hold that is won in the special symbol lottery in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol There is prepared a second table to be referred to when there is no hold in which the special symbol lottery is won. The first table has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%) of execution of variable display including a plurality of complete loss variable displays with the same variable display time as the variable display indicated by the received variation pattern command. Is set to be done. The second table also has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%) that the variable display including the complete loss variation display for a plurality of times with the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command can be executed. Set to be selected.

In the non-reach mode lottery, the sub-control board 940 selects, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the execution of the variable display including the plurality of complete loss variation displays for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected. Execute variable display including multiple display.

If the variation display indicated by the reach variation pattern received from the main control board 920 causes a special game state thereafter (that is, if the special symbol lottery is won), the sub-control board 940 displays a complete loss variation. It is controlled so that the stop symbol (fixed display) in the variable display consisting of the combination of is a big hit symbol.

Although the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is an integer multiple of the variable display time of the complete loss variable display in FIG. 23, the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is completely lost. When the variable display time of the variable display is not an integral multiple of the variable display time, the sub-control board 940 extends or shortens each variable display time of the one or more complete loss variation display, so that The variation display time of the variation display (variation display including the reach display) corresponding to the reach variation pattern received from the control board 920 is controlled.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol lottery is won during the suspension for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is a pending display, a variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display (that is, complete loss variable display) with the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed with a certain probability. Is configured.

In this way, by making it difficult to execute the variable display including the reach display, it is possible to suppress the event that the player stops the firing of the game ball when the reach display appears, so the first special symbol And it is possible to easily increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the second special symbol (easy to store the holding). Therefore, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned hold full tank effect is performed, since the hold for each special symbol is easily accumulated, the hold full tank effect is likely to appear, so that the player cannot see the hold full tank effect. This makes it harder to be dissatisfied and suppresses the decline in interest in games.

Only when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, instead of the variable display including the reach display, the variable display including the multiple variable display not including the reach display appears. Therefore, in the case where there is a hold that wins the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, the hold is easier to accumulate than when there is no hold that wins the special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the case where there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, the hold full tank production is easier to appear than when there is no hold that is won in the special symbol lottery. The appearance of the reserved full tank effect can create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state. As a result, the progress of the game can be made more comfortable, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display appears instead of the variable display that includes the reach display, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display that includes the reach display does not include the reach display. It is not necessary to have the display data of the variable display exclusively, and it is possible to use the display data of the variable display that does not include the reach display and has a shorter variable display time than the variable display including the reach display. Thereby, the consumption amount of the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 100 is appropriately suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed (variable display, stop display) on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, but in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, Cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, 711R having decorative patterns drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided side by side, and the decorative patterns are variably displayed by rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R respectively. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the game board 400X of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. 24 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the reel device 710, and FIG. 25(b) is a middle reel. It is a front view of 711M.

Similar to the game board 400, the game board 400X also includes a game area formed in a substantially circular shape on the front surface side of the base body 401 by the outer rails 402 and the inner rails 403, and a game ball launched from the launch device 330. When the game ball enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (flows down) while falling in the game area by its own weight.

As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400X is provided with the flow-down change members such as the nails 411 and the wind turbines 412, and the central structure 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base 401, similarly to the game board 400. At the same time, with respect to the upper start winning prize device 1431 arranged below the central structure 420, the lower starting prize winning device 1432 arranged below the upper starting prize winning device 1431, and the lower starting prize winning device 1432. And a big winning device 1434 arranged on the lower side, and starting devices 1436A and 1436B arranged on both the left and right sides of the central structure 420 are provided. Here, the upper start winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated, like the middle starting winning device 431.

The game board 400X has a switch (detection means) for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively. A plurality of (not shown) are provided so that the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected.

Specifically, a left-side starting prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left-side starting prize device 1431A, a right-side starting prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right-side starting prize device 1431B, and a game that has entered the lower-side starting prize device 1432. Lower start prize switch to detect the ball, big prize switch to detect the game ball that entered the big prize device 1434, left start switch to detect the game ball that entered the left start device 1436A, and right start device 1436B A right start switch for detecting a game ball is installed on the game board 400. These respective switches are connected to the main control board 920 similarly to the general prize switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) which detect the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

In the following, for the sake of convenience, the left-side starting prize switch, the right-side starting prize switch, the lower-side starting prize switch, the big winning switch, the left-side starting switch, and the right-side starting switch are respectively referred to as "left-side starting prize switch 1441A" and " It is also referred to as a "right side starting prize switch 1441B", a "lower starting prize switch 1442", a "big winning switch 1444", a "left side starting switch 1446A", and a "right side starting switch 1446B".

The entrance portion of the game ball in the left side winning award device 1431A, the right side starting award device 1431B, the lower side starting award device 1432, and the big award device 1434 constitutes a prize hole, and the game ball entering each prize hole is formed on the base 401. It is guided to a recovery and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the substrate 401 through the through hole. On the other hand, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the above winning devices, the entrance portion of the game ball in the left side starting device 1436A and the right side starting device 1436B constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area.

The left-side starting prize winning device 1431A is a starting device according to the first special symbol, similarly to the left-side middle starting winning device 431A, and the right-side starting winning device 1431B is similar to the right-side middle starting winning device 431B and is related to the second special symbol. It is a device. That is, the upper side starting winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device relating to the first special symbol and a starting device relating to the second special symbol.

The upper side starting prize winning device 1431 is provided with a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) for allocating the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left side starting prize winning device 1431A or the right side starting prize winning device 1431B. The distribution unit is provided on the back surface side of the base body 401, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 is guided to the back surface side of the base body 401 by a passage (not shown) and is used for distribution by the distribution unit. ..

Similar to the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit of the upper start prize winning apparatus 1431 is configured such that every time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, the prize winning apparatuses 1431A and 1431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched. .. As a result, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 basically enter the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B alternately.

The upper start winning device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper-side starting winning device 1431 does not cause a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 to enter the starting winning device 1431A, 1431B on either side, and is formed at a predetermined position with a very low probability. It has a function of discharging from the outlet to a collection and discharge passage (not shown). That is, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 via the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collecting and discharging passage without entering any of the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. The probability that the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 will be discharged to the collection and discharge passage without entering the starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, preferably about 1/1000. May be

The lower side starting winning device 1432 is a starting device relating to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432. The lower-side starting winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof, like the right starting winning device 432. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball does not need to be provided only in the lower starting prize winning device 1432, and instead of or in addition thereto, one of other winning devices such as the upper starting winning prize device 1431 or the like. You may provide in multiple numbers. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

Like the right starting prize winning device 432, the lower starting prize winning device 1432 is an entrance restricting mechanism 1452 for changing the probability of entering the game ball into the inside thereof by the transition between the entrance allowing posture and the entrance prohibiting posture, and the entrance regulating mechanism. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for driving the mechanism 1452 is provided. The entry regulation solenoid that drives the entry regulation mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the right entry regulation solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). Note that, hereinafter, the above-described entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is also referred to as an “entry restriction solenoid 1462” for convenience.

The entry regulation mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces driven by the entry regulation solenoid 1462. When the entry regulation mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibited posture, the two movement pieces constrict the entrance (winning hole). The game ball cannot enter the lower start prize winning apparatus 1432 by adopting (or closing) the arrangement, but when the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry permitting posture, the two movable pieces are separated from each other by the distance between their tip portions. The game ball can enter the lower start winning a prize device 1432 by adopting such an arrangement as to expand.

When the entry control mechanism 1452 wins in the lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") based on the fact that the game balls that have entered the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B related to the ordinary symbol are detected by the start switch 1446. Then, in response to the drive by the entry restriction solenoid 1462, the entry permission posture is changed a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

The special winning device 1434, like the upper special winning device 434, includes an entry restricting mechanism 1454 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the inside thereof by the transition between the admitting allowable posture and the prohibiting entering posture, and an approach restricting mechanism 1454. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for changing the posture is provided. The entry restriction solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10 ). Note that, hereinafter, the above-described entry restriction solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is also referred to as an “entry restriction solenoid 1464” for convenience.

The entry restriction mechanism 1454 includes a plate-shaped movable piece that is disposed on the front surface side of the special winning apparatus 1434 and is driven by the entry restriction solenoid 1464. The game piece cannot enter the big winning device 1434 because the movable piece closes the entrance (winning hole), but when the entry restricting mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece moves forward with the lower side as an axis. The game ball can enter the special winning device 1434 by being pushed down to open the entrance.

The big winning device 1434 allows a game ball to enter when a lottery for a big hit is won. Specifically, if the game ball that has entered the left-side starting winning device 1431A related to the first special symbol is won by the lottery (that is, the first special symbol lottery) based on being detected by the left-side starting winning switch 1441A, or , A lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the right starting prize winning device 1431B or the lower starting prize winning device 1432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting prize winning switch 1441B or the lower starting prize winning switch 1442 (that is, the second When winning the special symbol lottery), the entry restriction solenoid 1464 of the special winning device 1434 operates. By this operation, the entry regulation mechanism 1454 takes the entry permission posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the game board 400, a reel device 710 is provided in the opening of the central structure body 420 as a device for displaying a decorative symbol (variable display, stop display) instead of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is provided. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-shaped base body 701 arranged on the back surface side of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 25A, the reel device 710 has three rotating bodies arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a cylindrical left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row). ) 711R. The left reel 711L constitutes a left symbol row, the middle reel 711M constitutes a middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R constitutes a right symbol row.

Each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel 711L, 711M and 711R. The rotation axes of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction.

Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is connected to a reel drive motor (not shown) including a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive of the reel drive motor. In the following description, for convenience, the reel drive motors connected to the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M, and the right reel 711R are referred to as a "reel drive motor 721L", a "reel drive motor 721M", and a "reel drive motor 721M", respectively. It is also referred to as a "reel drive motor 721R".

The reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are all connected to the sub control board 940, and are independently driven by the control of the sub control board 940. As a result, the reels 711L, 711M, 711R can rotate individually, that is, independently.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, and by rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R individually, the decorative pattern Variable display is realized. The decorative design is composed of a main design 712 and a sub design 713 formed smaller than the main design 712.

The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can form a jackpot symbol. The main symbol 712 is configured as a symbol including information (hereinafter, this information is “numerical information”) that defines individual numerical values such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers, and is “1” in the present embodiment. It is constituted as a symbol to which each number from to "9" is attached, and the jackpot symbol is constituted by a combination of three identical main symbols 712.

The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged so that each number from "1" to "9" circulates around each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. More specifically, in the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, each main symbol 712 to which each number except for a part (specifically, "4") of "1" to "9" is attached, The reels 711L and 711R are arranged so that the reels 711L and 711R move in descending order when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front view left side. On the other hand, in the middle reel 711M, the respective main symbols 712 to which the respective numbers from "1" to "9" are attached change in ascending order when the middle reel 711M rotates clockwise when viewed from the front view left side. Is arranged as. In addition, although a configuration in which the sub symbol 713 is arranged is illustrated in a portion corresponding to “4”, the main symbol 712 with the number “4” is included in each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. Good.

The sub symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot form a jackpot symbol. In the present embodiment, the sub symbol 713 is configured as a symbol of a predetermined symbol that does not include numerical information. The sub symbol 713 is composed of a first sub symbol 713A provided on each reel 711L, 711M, 711R and a second sub symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. 25(b). ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B is arranged between the main symbol 712 numbered "3" and the main symbol 712 numbered "5" in the middle reel 711M. To be done. The second sub symbol 713B is provided in place of the symbol "4" in the main symbol 712, and is larger than the first sub symbol 713A as the other sub symbol 713 so that the player can easily recognize it. It is composed by.

Further, the first sub-pattern 713A, except for between the main symbol 712 numbered "3" and the main symbol 712 numbered "5" in the middle reel 711M, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. It is arranged between the respective main symbols 712 arranged in.

The reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the front side thereof protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 701, have a semi-circular cross section when viewed from the front view left side, and extend in the left-right direction. Is covered with a resin cover. The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate in which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed on the one surface side (for example, the back surface side) by fine unevenness, and at least one of the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the resin cover (for example, By irradiating light from light emitting portions (not shown) provided on the upper side and the lower side), an image of the predetermined decorative design can be displayed visually from the front.

Further, in the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 24, a holding lamp 720 for displaying the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), in the opening of the central structure 420. In addition, it is provided at a lower position with respect to the reel device 710. The hold lamp 720 is composed of a number of light-emissible parts (eight in this embodiment) corresponding to the total upper limit of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light emitting unit such as an LED is provided on the back side of each of the holding lamps 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light emitting unit so that the holding lamp 720 has a translucent light emission overlapping the front side of the light emitting unit. The part is configured to be turned on or off. The hold lamp 720 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off according to the increase/decrease in the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol by the control of the sub-control board 940.

In addition, a lottery result display device 730 is provided on the game board 400 in the opening of the central structure 420 on the right side of the holding lamp 720. The lottery result display device 730 is a device that suggests the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is composed of (four in this embodiment) lamps. The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub control board 940.

Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. Note that, in FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the holding lamp 720 are also displayed together.

As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 is composed of four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D and is arranged on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the third lamp 730C.

During the variable display of the decorative symbol by the reel device 710, that is, during the rotation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, the number of times of holding the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. Then, in the lottery result display device 730, as shown in FIG. 26A, one of the lamps 730A to 730D looks like a roulette wheel in the right direction (arrow Q direction) from the first lamp 730A. After the fourth lamp 730D is lit so as to sequentially move, and then the fourth lamp 730D is lit, it returns to the first lamp 730A again and sequentially moves from the first lamp 730A to the right to sequentially turn on and illuminate. The display is also referred to as “lamp fluctuation display”).

In the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730, the moving speed of the lighting lamps in the lamps 730A to 730D (lighting interval of the lamps) is fast, and after the high speed fluctuation, the moving speed is gradually reduced and the lamp fluctuation is gradually decreased. When a predetermined variable display time elapses from the start of the display, one of the lamps 730A to 730D that corresponds to the lottery result of the reserved full production is turned on to finally stop (stop display).

More specifically, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamps 730A to 730D. After performing the variable display, the fourth lamp 730D is turned on and stopped. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, the lottery result display device 730 causes the lamps other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A and the second lamp 730B. , Or the third lamp 730C is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing when the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is fixedly displayed after the reach display appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed on the reel device 710. A configuration is provided for adjusting the variation display time of the variation display (lamp variation display) by the lottery result display device 730 so as to deviate from the period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a “reach production period”).

Specifically, when the lamp variation display by the lottery result display device 730 is started by the number of times of holding of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached the upper limit, the lamp variation is displayed. On the other hand, the elapse timing of the predetermined basic variable display time (for example, 3 seconds) (that is, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730) is the reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed on the reel device 710. In the production period, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended.

The sub-control board 940, when starting the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 when the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, is being executed. It is determined whether the variable display of the decorative pattern is the variable display including the reach display.

Next, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is the variable display including the reach display, when the lamp variable display is performed only for the basic variable display time. , It is determined whether or not the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 arrives during the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that it is time to stop and display in the lottery result display device 730 during the reach production period in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, in the lottery result display device 730. The variation display time of the lamp variation display is extended so that the timing of stop display comes after the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative pattern that is being executed ends (that is, after the confirmation display is made).

For example, the lamp fluctuation display may be changed so that the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the timing at which the fixed display is displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. Extend the variable display time. The variation display time of the lamp variation display may be extended so that the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes at the timing at which the confirmation display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed.

Alternatively, a period from the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed when the lamp fluctuation display is performed only for the basic fluctuation display time to the timing at which the final display is displayed in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol being executed ( Hereinafter, this period may also be referred to as a “reach production remaining period”), and the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended by a uniform time. In this case, for example, if the reach production remaining period is 5 seconds or less, the variation display time of the lamp variation display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the reach production remaining period is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the lamp variation display is displayed. The variable display time may be extended by 11 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 to FIG. 29, the prefetching effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The "read-ahead effect" is a type of suggestive effect, and when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is suspended, the special symbol for the suspension is selected. Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a notice about a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after the end of the unit game performed by the digestion of the hold.

Here, the pre-reading effect that gives a notice about a specific game state that occurs after the end of the unit game may be an effect that always transitions to a specific game state when the effect occurs, or the effect When the occurrence occurs, it may be a transition to a specific game state, but may be an effect that can be executed even if it does not transition to a specific game state, an effect that makes the player expect a transition to a specific game state. including. Further, the prefetch effect is not limited to an effect that gives a notice of a specific game state that occurs immediately after the end of the unit game in which the effect is executed, but a specific game state that occurs after one or more variable displays are executed. It may be a production for announcing.

27 and 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the second sub symbol warning is given, and FIG. 29 is the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the countdown warning is given. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

The second sub-symbol predictor notice and the countdown notice are both types of pre-reading effects. The sub-control board 940 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the predetermined effect target information received from the main control board 920, and what kind of pre-reading effect is to be executed when the pre-reading effect is executed. decide.

Specifically, when the starting winning of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) occurs, the main control board 920, based on the value of the random number acquired based on the occurrence of the starting winning, the starting winning is concerned. While performing the corresponding special symbol lottery, the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is determined. This determination is made before the variable display executed based on the starting winning is started. The main control board 920, the information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is won (hereinafter, also referred to as "win/win correspondence information"), and the variable display time that has been or will be determined. The information corresponding to (hereinafter also referred to as “variable display time correspondence information”) is used as effect target information, and a command including the effect target information is output to the sub control board 940.

Here, the production target information may be information selected or determined based on the value of the random number acquired by the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning, and, for example, the information indicating whether or not the winning is achieved and the variation. The information indicating the display time may be the production target information, and for example, the information indicating the rough change display time such as whether or not the change display includes the reach display as the change display time is output as the change display time corresponding information. Good. Further, the obtained random number value itself is used as the performance target information, and the random number value itself obtained by the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the same selection is made for both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940. It may be configured to include control for determining the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable display time depending on the method.

The command including the effect target information may be a hold command or a command dedicated to outputting the effect target information. Further, the effect target information may not include the variable display time correspondence information, and may be configured by only the winning/rejecting information. When the sub-control board 940 receives the performance target information from the main control board 920, based on the performance target information and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbol, the unit game corresponding to the performance target information. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect for giving a notice of the game state that occurs after the end. The sub-control board 940, when determining the execution of the prefetching effect, determines the type of the prefetching effect to be executed. In addition, when execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the unit game of the special symbol for the effect target information corresponding to the prefetch effect is also referred to as “variable display of the prefetch object”.

First, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the second sub symbol precursor notice will be described. The second sub-symbol predictor notice is displayed after the lost symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed on the middle line L2 which is one of the effective lines as a stop symbol, and then the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. This is a pre-reading effect in which the middle reel 711M remains stopped without changing (rotating). The control of the second sub symbol warning is performed by the sub control board 940, and the control of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R described below is performed by the sub control board 940.

The "effective line" is a line that transitions to the special game state when the big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the uppermost upper line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3 are three. A valid line is set. The number of effective lines is not limited to the above-mentioned form, but may be more, such as five effective lines including two obliquely upward and downward rightward effective lines, or a small number such as only the middle stage line L2. You may.

For example, when the start winning of the special symbol that is the prefetch target occurs in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, the variable display two before the prefetch target is started. After that, the variation display ends when the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 which is one of the activated lines as a stopped symbol.

More specifically, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R that are changed in the variable display two before the prefetch target are first stopped so that the middle reel 711M displays the second sub symbol 713B on the middle line L2. To control. Since the second sub symbol 713B is a symbol that does not form a big hit symbol, the second sub symbol 713B is displayed on the middle line L2, so that the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, but the middle line. It is shown to the player that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol which is stopped and displayed on L2.

When the middle reel 711M is stopped, then, the left reel 711M is controlled so as to be stopped in a state where the main symbol 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. In each reel 711L, 711M, 711R, since the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. By displaying the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711R on the middle line L2 in a stopped state, the symbols of the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711R are displayed in any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3. The player is shown that the reach display is not formed with the symbol and the lost symbol is already stopped and displayed on all the activated lines L1 to L3.

After the left reel 711L is stopped, the right reel 711R is controlled to be stopped. The right reel 711R controls so that the stop symbol stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2 is different depending on whether it is the variable display of the prefetch target or the variable display performed before the prefetch target. When the variable display is performed before the prefetch target, control is performed so that the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol 713 which is not the reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped at the middle line L2 is stopped. To do. Therefore, in the variable display two before the pre-reading target, the player is informed that the reach display is not formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on each of the activated lines, and the variable display is stopped with a missing symbol. indicate.

After the end of the variable display two before the prefetch target, the variable display in the unit game of the special symbol that has been suspended next (variable display one before the prefetch target) is started. In the variable display, the left and right reels 711L, while the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating) (that is, while keeping the state where the second sub symbol 713B is displayed on the middle line L2), The fluctuation of 711R is started.

The "state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating)" is not limited to the middle reel 711M being completely stopped, and the second sub symbol 713B is within a predetermined range including the middle line L2. It may be accompanied by an action such as swinging, for example, in a state in which the second sub-pattern 713B is stopped while operating up and down within a range overlapping with a virtual straight line as the middle line L2 in a front view. Alternatively, in this state, the middle reel 711M may be stopped without changing (rotating).

The left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the preceding variable display of the prefetch target are controlled so that the left reel 711L first stops in a state in which one of the main symbols 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, even in the variable display, similarly to the above-described variable display two before the prefetch target, in the situation where the right reel 711R is variably displayed, the lost symbol is already stopped and displayed on all the activated lines. It is suppressed that the reach display is formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

Here, in the prefetch effect in the present embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are changed, and reach display is formed or not formed by these two reels 711L and 711R. In order that the player can pay attention to whether or not the main symbol 712 is formed, the variation display in which the variation of the middle reel 711M is not performed is intentionally set. In this case, if a combination of some of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed by the symbols on the left reel 711L and the symbols on the middle reel 711M, the player recognizes that the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are the effects to be noticed. If this is not possible, the reach display may be formed by the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, and it may be expected to develop into a special effect. Therefore, during execution of the prefetching effect, when the left reel 711L is stopped, the reach display is controlled not to be formed depending on the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

Note that the prefetch effect is controlled by changing the probability (expectation level) of transitioning to the special game state depending on how many times before the variable display of the prefetch target the prefetch effect is started. Is preferable, as the number of times the variable display is continuously executed is increased, it is preferable to control so that the probability (expected degree) of transitioning to the special game state is set higher, and the main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol. The number of prize balls (for example, the number of rounds) that the player can obtain in the special game state is set differently according to the type of, or the game state transitioning after the special game state is the main symbol 712 as a jackpot symbol. It is preferable to set differently depending on the type because the type of the main symbol 712 forming the reach display stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the prefetch effect can be noticed.

After the stop of the left reel 711L, like the variation display before the variation display being executed, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol that is not the reach display in the combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 The right reel 711R is controlled to stop so that 713 is stopped and displayed. As a result, even in the preceding variable display of the prefetch target, similarly to the above-described variable display of the preceding read target, the respective reachable lines L1, L2, L3 are reached by the left and right reels 711L, 711R. The player is shown the state in which no display is formed, and the variable display is stopped and displayed with a lost design.

Here, as the stop control of the right reel 711R during the pre-reading effect, the player can take time to pay attention to whether or not the reach display is performed in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L, or not. The main symbol 712 of the right reel 711R (in this embodiment, the same main symbol 712) capable of forming a reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L is near the middle line L2 and is slightly closer to the upper side. The movement is controlled to be slower, and the speed is controlled so that the speed becomes even slower so as to stop at a position where it overlaps with the middle line L2. Then, in the variable display before the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 is moved to the lower side from a state where it is likely to stop at a position where it overlaps with the middle line L2, and the main symbol 712 stops at the lower line L3, and the middle line L2. The sub-pattern 713 may be controlled to stop.

After the end of the variable display immediately preceding the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started. In the variable display of the pre-reading target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are also changed in a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing, similarly to the above-described variable display of the two pre-reading targets.

As shown in FIG. 28, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that change in the variable display of the prefetch target are controlled to form a reach display on the middle line L2 and stop the display. For example, in the variable display of the prefetch target, like the variable display before the prefetch target illustrated above, the main symbol 712 that is the same as the main symbol 712 that is stopped on the left reel 711L is likely to stop when it overlaps the middle line L2. It may be controlled so as to be even slower, and then, from a state in which it is likely to stop at a position where it overlaps with the middle-stage line L2, it may be controlled so that the perfect symbol 712 and the main symbol 712 stop at the middle-stage line L2.

In the variable display of the pre-reading target, after the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed while forming the reach display, the change of the middle reel 711M is started, and thereafter, the middle reel 711M is stopped to change the change of the pre-reading target. The display ends. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display (that is, after the end of the variable display of the prefetch target), the game state transitions to the special game state. .. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state without transitioning to the special gaming state.

As for the second sub-symbol predictive notice, in the above, the case where the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2 is exemplified, but the unit of the special symbol When the start prize of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of times the game is held is 1, or when the number of times to hold the unit game of the special symbol is 3 or more, the start prize of the special symbol to be prefetched is Even when it occurs, it may be configured to give the second sub-symbol predictor similarly.

Next, the countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a look-ahead effect that counts down the number of change displays executed before the change display of the read-ahead target is executed in the change display before the change display of the read-ahead target by the number included in the main symbol 712. .. The control of the countdown notice is performed by the sub control board 940.

For example, in the case where the starting winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 29, the variable display three before the prefetch target is started. After that, the variable display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “3” on the middle reel 711M is positioned at the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are respectively activated lines L1 and L2. , L3, the stop symbol is stopped so as to be a lost symbol, and the process ends.

After the end of the variable display three before the prefetch target, the variable display in the unit game of the special symbol that has been suspended next (variable display two before the prefetch target) is started. The variable display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “2” on the middle reel 711M is positioned in the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are activated lines L1, L2, L3. In, it ends by being stopped so that the stop symbol becomes a lost symbol.

After the end of the variable display two before the prefetch target, the variable display one before the prefetch target is started, and in the variable display, the main symbol 712 with the number “1” on the middle reel 711M is the middle line. After being stopped in the state of being located at L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped by stopping the stop symbols in each of the activated lines L1, L2, and L3 so that the stop symbols are lost symbols.

After the end of the variable display one before the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started, and the big hit symbol or the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol. In the variable display of the prefetch target, the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M are stopped in this order.

In addition, as for the countdown notice, in the above, the case where the starting prize of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 3 is illustrated, but the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is held. When the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state of 2 or when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 4 or more Similarly, the countdown notice may be given in advance. Further, it may be configured to give a countdown notice when a start winning of a special symbol to be prefetched occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of holdings of the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamp fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation display time, and then the lamps 730A to 730D. Since the lottery result of the hold full production effect lottery is informed by the position of the lamp which is stopped and displayed, the expectation for the execution of the hold full production can be suitably amplified during the period in which the lamp fluctuation display is executed. ..

In particular, since the position of the lamp to be stopped and displayed is different depending on whether the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery or when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected, It is easy for a person to intuitively judge whether or not the appearance of the reserved full production is selected from the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed. Further, since the stop display for notifying the lottery result of the held full production effect lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D configuring the lottery result display device 730, the line of sight of the player when seeing the stop display is It is hard to scatter and the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result display device 730 displays the lottery result of the pending full tank production lottery, the stop display (that is, the display of the lottery result of the pending full tank production lottery) is performed. The timing is configured to be out of the reach production period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 during the effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as the suggested effect executed in the reach effect period. As a result, the player's interest can be concentrated on effects such as suggestive effects that are executed during the reach effect period, and the expectation that the player has for the variable display being executed due to the suggestive effects can be improved appropriately. Can be made. Further, since the display time of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display time of the suggestion effect, the player may miss the lottery result of the held full production lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a second sub-symbol predictive notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, before the variable display of the prefetch target. In the variable display executed in step 1 and the variable display of the prefetch target, since the variable display of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is performed while the middle reel 711M is stopped, the player changes the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since the display is started, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that comes after that.

In particular, since the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target starts variation in synchronization with the reach display being formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, I strongly impressed that the end time of the variable display of the prefetch target (that is, the display of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target) was approaching, thereby further increasing the expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target. be able to.

Further, in the second sub-symbol warning, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R is synchronized with the reach display formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R after that. Since it continues to be stopped until it is changed, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the changing reel 711M in the change display of the prefetch target, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the lottery result for the change display of the prefetch target. ..

Also, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, the second sub-pattern 713B that continues to be stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 constitutes a big hit symbol. Since it is a symbol that is not displayed, in the variable display executed before the variable display of the prefetch target, that is, before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed, it is possible to prevent the situation where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. ..

Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, a part of the symbols that do not form the big hit symbol, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, is a middle symbol row of the middle line L2 ( Since it continues to be displayed on the middle reel 711M) during the entire variation display, the player recognizes that the big hit symbol is not displayed on the middle line L2 in the variation display prior to the variation display of the prefetch target, and thereafter, It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the variable display of the read-ahead target that arrives.

In particular, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 are the second sub symbol 713B that is uniquely provided on the middle reel 711M among the sub symbols 713. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-symbol precursor notice has started. Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice of the present embodiment, the second sub-symbol 713B is, among the plurality of activated lines L1, L2, L3, a middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 located in the middle. Since this is also displayed, it is easy to attract the player's attention in this respect as well, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-symbol precursor notice has started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the countdown notice, in the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, the number of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is set to the middle reel 711M. Since it counts down by the number included in the main symbol 712, the player visually recognizes the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M in the variable display during execution, and thereafter the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. It is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display executed. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that gradually approaches.

Further, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed before the variable display of the prefetching target is executed is performed by changing the main symbol 712 of the reel for variably displaying the decorative symbol (main symbol 712, sub symbol 713). Since it is performed by using the player, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the countdown.

Further, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M that counts down the number of variable displays performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is stopped is stopped before the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since it is easy to distinguish the reel to be performed (middle reel 711M) from the other reels (left and right reels 711L and 711R), it is possible to prevent the player from missing the countdown.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a flat plate member having light transmissivity (translucency), and the characteristics of the base 401 are used to enjoy the game. Has been devised to enhance the. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, using the light-transmitting substrate 401, the display area of the reel device 710 can be exceeded by the display area where the reel device 710 is visible in front view and its outer portion. A school of fish will be described as an example of the light-emitting display for effect displayed as. 30A is an enlarged front view around the reel device 710 in the game board 400X, and FIG. 30B is a simplified main configuration of the game board 400X taken along the line AA in FIG. 30A. FIG. 31A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device 710 taken along the line BB of FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view for explaining the school of fish displayed as.

30(a), 30(b), and 31(b), the central structure 420 is not shown. Also, in FIG. 30B, for reference, a part of the nail 411 provided on the base 401 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and the rear plate 223 is shown by a dashed-dotted line. Further, in FIG. 31A, the rear plate 223 is indicated by a dashed line for reference. 30(b) and 31(a), cross-section hatching is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a light-transmissive flat plate member. As shown in FIG. 30A, the base 401 is formed with an opening 401D that constitutes an opening to which the central structure 420 is attached. The central structure 420 is made of a translucent resin material that is attached by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front and allows a part of the school of fish displayed on the back side to be visible. The illustration is omitted in FIG.

On the front surface of the base 401, on the left and right sides of the reel device 710, there are drawn fish patterns 741 of various sizes, which form a part of a school of fish (a school of fish) continuous facing the left direction. It is drawn by printing a colored paint having a light property. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the base 401 also includes a pattern partially cut off by the peripheral edge (edge) of the opening 401D like the pattern 741A.

Like the base 401, the base 701 arranged on the back surface side of the game board 400 is also configured as a light-transmissive flat plate member. As shown in FIG. 30A, on the front surface of the base body 701, a part of a school of fish that faces left along with the fish drawn by the pattern 741 inside the opening 401D and on the left side and the right side of the reel device 710. The fish pattern 742 that forms the image is drawn in various sizes.

The fish pattern 742 drawn on the base body 701 is paired with a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A), which is only a part of the fish by itself like the pattern 742A but is partially interrupted by the periphery of the opening 401D. It also contains the pattern that makes up one fish when viewed from the front.

Further, the fish pattern 742 drawn on the base body 701 includes a pattern partly interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 like the patterns 742B, 742C and 742D. The pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side in which one fish is divided into left and right, As a result, it is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the pattern continuously expresses a group of fish as an integrated object in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 30B, a board surface light emitting device 490A which is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided on the back side of the base body 401. The board surface light emitting device 490A is arranged such that the light emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base 401 is located. Therefore, by lighting (emits) the light emitting means E1 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401, the pattern 741 emerging in the light can be displayed.

On the other hand, on the back side of the base body 701, a board surface light emitting device 490B which is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided. The board surface light emitting device 490B includes a light emitting means E2 such as an LED and a light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31A) directed to the base 701. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base 701, the pattern 742 emerging in the light can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), between the openings 401D of the base body 401 and the peripheral edge of the base body 701, a plate-like member having a light-transmissive property extending in the front-back direction substantially perpendicular to the base bodies 401, 701. Is provided with a side wall portion 702. On the surface of the side wall portion 702 (the surface facing the inside of the opening 401D), a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) partially cut off by the peripheral edge of the opening 401D, and a pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741. ) Is connected to the picture (not shown). As a result, it is possible to prevent the fish configured by the combination of the design 741 and the design 742 from being divided and seen by the step between the base 401 and the base 701.

A board surface light emitting device 490C that is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The board surface light emitting device 490C includes a light emitting means E3 such as an LED provided so that light can be emitted toward the side wall portion 702. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E3 arranged on the back side of the area where the pattern is drawn on the side wall portion 702, the pattern emerging in the light can be displayed.

The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a light-transmitting cover that covers the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. As shown in FIG. 31A, the resin cover 715 of the present embodiment is configured in an arc shape whose side cross section curves along the cross section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a translucent outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701, and a light guide plate 715B arranged on the rear side of the outer cover 715A.

In the light guide plate 715B, a fish pattern 743 forming a part of a school of fish facing left is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of a resin plate having light transmittance. The light emitting means E4 such as an LED provided on the board surface light emitting device 490B is arranged along the upper end of the light guide plate 715B above the upper end thereof, and along the lower end thereof below the lower end of the light guide plate 715B. It is arranged.

The light guide plate 715B is visible from the front side to the back side when the light emitting means E4 is not turned on, and the player can see the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be visually recognized through. On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 is incident on the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, whereby the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) has a structure shown in FIG. As shown in (b), a fish pattern 743 forming a part of the school of fish is displayed.

Like the patterns 743B and 743C, the fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B is a pattern in which a part of the fish is drawn by itself, but a part of the pattern is interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715. It also includes a pattern that forms a single fish when paired with 742 (for example, the patterns 742B and 742C).

The patterns 743B, 743C, and the like, which form a single fish by pairing with the pattern 742 that is partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715, are predetermined below the top of the resin cover 715 located at the front. Are formed so as to be displayed within the range of the areas R1 and R2.

The “predetermined region” is, for example, 2/5 from the top side in the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A. It is a lower region, preferably a region lower than 1/2 from the top side in the height difference, and a region lower than 3/5 from the top side in the height difference. The end of the “predetermined region” on the side of the base 701 may or may not be in contact with the base 701, but is preferably in contact with the base 701.

Since the regions R1 and R2 are closer to the surface (front surface) of the base body 701 than the vicinity of the top of the resin cover 715, a part of the pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742B, is separated from the boundary with the resin cover 715). 742C) and the pattern 743 paired with the pattern 742 (for example, patterns 743B and 743C) can be suppressed in height difference (height in the front-rear direction). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion when the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 is viewed from the front, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fish pattern formed by the pattern 742 and the pattern 743 to form a sense of strangeness.

Here, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710 has a shape that bulges in an arc shape toward the front side in a side view, and the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) also has each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. It is configured in a shape that bulges in an arc shape in the front side along the surface shape of. Therefore, the reels 711L, 711M, and the reels 711L, 711M, are positioned so as to be positioned between the base 401 forming the game area where the game balls flow down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) positioned on the front side thereof, or in front of the transparent plate. 711R and the front end of the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) are arranged, the upper and lower ends of the display area of the reel device 710 which are visible in the front view are displaced rearward from the front surface of the base 401. It will be. The base 701 is arranged in a plane so as to be at substantially the same front and rear positions as the upper and lower end portions of the display area of the reel device 710 that can be visually seen in a front view, whereby the fish displayed on the light guide plate 715B can be displayed. A sense of unity between the design 743 and the design 742 displayed on the base body 701 can be expressed, and the design of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R located inside the base body 701 when viewed from the player side is on the base body 701. It can be emphasized and displayed in comparison with the displayed pattern 742, and the result of the win or failure can be displayed in an easily understandable manner for the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to turning on the light emitting means E4 to display the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by turning on the light emitting means E1 to E3, a group of fish facing the left direction can be displayed. It is possible to display in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting means E1 to E4, it is possible to perform an effect in which the school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the flow path of the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 will be described.

FIG. 32A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431 and 1432 in the game board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. 32B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 400X taken along the line CC of FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32C is a top view of FIG. 32A viewed from the upper side. FIG. 32D is a diagram showing how the information display unit 753 is viewed when a player playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment obliquely looks at the lower left direction.

Note that, in FIG. 32A, the distribution unit 1620 is illustrated with a schematic outer shape. In FIG. 32C, the right side portion of the upper starting winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surfaces of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second sub passage 1614A are omitted.

32B and 32C, the nails 411 are illustrated except for the nails 411A (a part of the nails 411) arranged in the lower right direction from the upper side of the information display unit 753 on the left side in the gaming machine front view. And the lower start prize winning device 1432 is not shown. In addition, in FIG. 32B, for reference, a portion of one of the nails 411A embedded in the base body 401 is illustrated, and other portions of the nail 411A projecting to the front side of the base body 401 are illustrated. The two-dot chain line is shown, and the rear plate 223 is shown by the one-dot chain line. In FIG. 32C, for reference, a portion of the nail 411A projecting to the front side of the base body 401 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

32(b) and 32(c), for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is shown, and part of the upper starting winning device 1431 The flow path of the is shown by the arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 of the game board 400X, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 are distributed to the distribution unit 1620. A guide passage 1612 for guiding, a left and right first passages 1613A, 1613B through which the game balls distributed by the distribution unit 1620 flow down, and second passages 1614A, 1614B branching from the left and right first passages 1613A, 1613B, respectively. Is provided.

Each of these passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, 1614B is formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, as shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c). It The passage forming member 1631 is made of a light transmissive resin.

As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the guide passage 1612 penetrates the base 401 to guide the game ball (for example, the game ball P1) entering from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base 401. It is a passage that guides the game ball downward on the upper side of the distribution unit 1620 after guiding from the formed opening 401C to the position above the distribution unit 1620 to the back side (rear side).

The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are provided for distribution by the distribution unit 1620. The distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper side starting winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. That is, like the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit 1620 alternately switches the distribution destination every time the game ball enters from the entrance 1611.

Specifically, the distribution unit 1620 distributes the game ball guided by the guide passage 1612 to the left first passage 1613A located on the left side of the distribution unit 1620 in the game machine front view, or in the game machine front view. The distribution is performed alternately to the right first passage 1613B located on the right side of the distribution unit 1620.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the left-side first passage 1613A will be described later among the upstream-side passage 1613A1 that constitutes the upstream-side passage in the left-side first passage 1613A and the game ball that has passed through the upstream-side passage 1613A1. It is composed of a downstream passage 1613A2 through which the game balls that have not entered the left second passage 1614A flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613A1 guides the game ball (for example, the game ball P2) distributed to the left side by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side and then to the back side (rear side). It is a passage that guides and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction (from the front to the back in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 32(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(c), the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the left second passage 1614A branched from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream passage 1613A2 guides the game ball guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream passage 1613A1 to the collecting and discharging passage (not shown) after continuously guiding the gaming ball in the substantially vertical downward direction.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), the left side second passage 1614A is a passage formed by branching leftward at a portion of the upstream passage 1613A1 extending downward. The left side second passage 1614A guides a game ball (for example, a game ball P3) that has entered from the left side first passage 1613A (upstream side passage 1613A1) to the left side, and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction like the game ball P4. Then, it guides to the collection and discharge passage.

The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 will enter the left side second passage 1614A is much lower than the probability that the game ball will enter the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability of a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 entering the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the left side starting prize switch 1441A is provided so as to be able to detect the game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the left side first passage 1613A enters the downstream side passage 1613A2 from the upstream side passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left side starting prize winning switch 1441A.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the left side first passage 1613A by the distribution unit 1620 enters the left side starting prize winning device 1431A by passing through the downstream side passage 1613A2, and is detected by the left side starting prize winning switch 1441A. It will be the starting prize of the design.

On the other hand, when the game ball passing through the left side first passage 1613A enters the left side second passage 1614A from the upstream side passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left side starting winning switch 1441A. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left side second passage 1614A without entering the downstream passage 1613A2, the start winning of the first special symbol does not occur.

On the other hand, the right side first passage 1613B is, as shown in FIG. 32(a), an upstream side passage 1613B1 that constitutes an upstream side passage in the right side first passage 1613B and a game ball that has passed through the upstream side passage 1613B1. It is composed of a downstream side passage 1613B2 through which game balls that have not entered the right side second passage 1614B described later flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution unit 1620 to the right side, and then to the back side (rear side) similarly to the upstream passage 1613A1. It is a passage that guides in a substantially vertical downward direction.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the right second passage 1614B branched from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream passage 1613B2 guides the game ball guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream passage 1613B1 in the substantially vertical downward direction, and then guides it to the recovery discharge passage.

The right second passage 1614B is a passage formed by branching to the right in a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613B1 as shown in FIG. 32(a). The right side second passage 1614B guides the game ball that has entered from the right side first passage 1613B (upstream side passage 1613B1) to the right side, then guides it in a substantially vertical downward direction, and then guides it to the recovery discharge passage.

The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 will enter the right side second passage 1614B is much lower than the probability that the game ball will enter the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right side second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the right side starting prize switch 1441B is provided so as to be able to detect the game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the right side first passage 1613B enters the downstream side passage 1613B2 from the upstream side passage 1613B1, the game ball is detected by the right side start winning switch 1441B.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right side first passage 1613B by the distribution unit 1620 enters the right side starting prize winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream side passage 1613B2, and is detected by the right side starting prize winning switch 1441B to be the second special. It will be the starting prize of the design.

On the other hand, when the game ball passing through the right side first passage 1613B enters the right side second passage 1614B from the upstream side passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right start prize winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream side passage 1613B1 enters the right side second passage 1614B without entering the downstream side passage 1613B2, the start winning of the second special symbol does not occur.

A region J in the base 401 corresponds to a range surrounded by a thick line in FIG. 32A, and an image such as the above-described pattern 741 is not drawn in this range, and a region in which the image or the like is drawn is drawn. It is configured as a region having higher visibility when viewed from the front side than the rear side. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the region J is the front of the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1, 1613B1, the left and right downstream passages 1613A2, 1613B2 and the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B. It is provided at the position where it overlaps.

As described above, since the passage forming member 1631 forming each of the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, 1614B is made of a light-transmissive resin, the player can start from the entrance 1611 with the upper start winning device. The flow-down path of the game ball that has entered 1431 can be visually recognized through the region J of the base 401.

Therefore, when the game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player visually recognizes the flow down path of the game ball through the region J of the base 401, so that the game ball is distributed to either the left or right by the distribution unit 1620. It is possible to know whether or not the player has been assigned to the player or whether or not the player has entered the passage (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) in which the special winning prize is generated.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32(a), information display units 751 to 754 are provided to notify the player of characteristic areas on the game board 400X.

The information display portion 751 is provided near the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper starting winning device 1431. The character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 751. Therefore, the player can recognize that the region into which the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper start winning device 1431 by looking at the character string “IN”. That is, the character string of “IN” displayed on the information display unit 751 can be recognized by the player as the area (that is, the entrance 1611) to which the information display unit 751 is attached is the entrance of the upper start winning a prize device 1431. Information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "starting winning device entrance information").

The information display portion 752 is provided on the front surface of the base 401 so as to overlap with the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 at positions near the branching positions with the second passages 1614A and 1614B. A character string of "lucky" is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 752.

Therefore, the player sees the character string of "lucky", the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2), the start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) You can recognize that it is a winning area. In other words, the character string of "lucky" displayed on the information display unit 752 is the start of the special symbol when the area where the information display unit 752 is attached (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2, 1613B2) enters the game ball. It functions as information by which the player can recognize that the area where a prize is generated (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "starting prize area information").

The information display portion 753 includes a passage wall forming a passage extending leftward or rightward of the second passages 1614A, 1614B in the passage forming member 1631 so as to overlap the inlets of the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B slightly downstream. It is provided on the back side of the passage wall (for example, the passage wall portion 1631A of FIG. 32C) which is the rear side of the gaming machine front view. The character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 753.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the second passage 1614A, 1614B) has entered the area where the special winning symbol is not awarded by looking at the character string "OUT". .. That is, the character string of "OUT" displayed on the information display unit 753 is a special symbol even if the area where the information display unit 753 is attached (ie, the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B) is entered by the game ball. It functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "non-start winning area information") that allows the player to recognize that the starting winning area is not generated.

The information display unit 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower starting prize winning device 1432 so as to overlap the opening 1432A for guiding the game ball that has entered the lower starting prize winning device 1432 to the back side (rear side) of the base 401. The character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 754.

The game ball that has entered the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start prize winning switch 1442, so that the player sees the character string "GO", and the area where the game ball has entered is the second special symbol start prize. It can be recognized that it is the area. That is, the character string of “GO” displayed on the information display unit 754 functions as the start winning area information similar to “Lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752.

Among the information display portions 751 to 754, on the surface of the information display portions 751, 752, 754, information that gives the player expectation for a special winning symbol, such as starting winning device entrance information and starting winning area information, is provided. It is displayed. The information display portions 751, 752, 754 are provided at positions such as the upper and lower starting prize winning devices 1431, 1432 and the front surface of the base 401 that the player can directly see through the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223.

Therefore, since the information display portions 751, 752, 754 are arranged at positions that are relatively easy to be visually recognized, when the game ball enters the area corresponding to each of the information display portions 751, 752, 754, the special holding by the player is held. The expectation for the starting winning of the symbol can be appropriately amplified.

As shown in FIG. 32A, from the upper side to the right side of the information display portion 753 on the left side, five nails 411A arranged in descending rightward direction are arranged. As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the information display portion 753 on the left side is within the range of the vertical direction and the range of the horizontal direction in which these five nails 411A are arranged. Is also set up to fit.

When the nail 411A is erected in such an arrangement with respect to the information display portion 753 on the left side, and the player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 while playing is obliquely looking in the lower left direction, To the player, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the information display portion 753 on the left side seems to overlap with the rear side of the five nails 411A.

As a result, the visibility of the information display portion 753 on the left side is obstructed by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction. On the surface of the information display portion 753, information such as a character string of "OUT" (that is, non-starting winning area information) that reduces the expectation of the player for the starting winning of the special symbol is displayed. Since the visibility of the information display unit 753 is impeded by the nail 411A of the book, it is difficult for the player to have an impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753.

Even when the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display portion 753 (that is, the second passage 1614A, 1614B on the left and right), the special symbol does not start. The information display unit 753 can prevent the player from making a strong impression. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement that the starting prize of the special symbol has not been achieved even though the game ball has entered the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

Similarly to the information display unit 753 on the left side, the information display unit 753 on the right side is provided with five nails 411B arranged in descending left direction from the upper side to the left side of the information display unit 753 (see FIG. 32(a )), the information display portion 753 is provided so as to be included in any of the vertical range and the horizontal range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

Therefore, when a player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 because he is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower right direction, the information display section 753 on the right side of the player is behind the five nails 411B. Since it appears to overlap on the side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. As a result, like the case of the information display portion 753 on the left side, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement that the starting winning of the special symbol is not achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32A, in each of the left and right information display portions 753, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the surface thereof has the nail 411A or the nail 411B corresponding to each information display portion 753. Are arranged along the arrangement direction of. That is, the character string of "OUT" displayed on the information display unit 753 on the left side is arranged in the lower right direction similarly to the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string of "OUT" displayed on the information display unit 753 on the right side is , The nails 411B are arranged in the lower left direction similarly to the arrangement of the nails 411B.

Thus, by arranging the character strings displayed on the information display unit 753 along the arrangement direction of the nails 411A or 411B, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the nails 411A can be overlapped on the rear side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 can be appropriately reduced.

Since the information display portion 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base body 401 as shown in FIG. 32C, the visibility of the information display portion 753 visually recognized through the base body 401 is The visibility is lower than the visibility of the information display portions 751, 752, 754 that can be visually recognized without passing through the base 401.

In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base 401 but also the passage wall portion 1631A and the like, among the passage wall portions forming the passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Since the passage wall portion is present, the visibility of the information display portion 753 further deteriorates.

Therefore, since the base 401 and the passage wall portion 1631A overlap with the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 is less likely to be impressive. As a result, the player's discouragement when the starting prize of the first special symbol is not achieved despite the game ball entering the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611 can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32(c), since the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage that guides the game ball to the left side and then to the back side, a passage wall that constitutes the left end of the upstream passage 1613A1. The portion 1631B is configured as a wall surface that is substantially vertical to the base 401 and extends in the vertical direction. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the passage wall portion 1631B is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the information display portion 753 on the left side in the field of view of the player who obliquely looks at the lower left direction, the information display portion 753 is visually recognized. The sex is hindered by the passage wall portion 1631B overlapping the front side. Therefore, also in this respect, the impression of the character string of "OUT" displayed on the information display unit 753 is less likely to remain in the player, so that the player is more discouraged for not having the start winning of the special symbol. Can be suppressed to

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to display a group of fish facing leftward in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. Therefore, compared to the case where the school of fish is displayed using only the light guide plate 715B of the resin cover 715, the effect of displaying the school of fish can have a high impression.

In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display the pattern 742 that forms a part of a continuous school of fish facing leftward, like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate. Even if there is a structural separation from the 715B, the pattern 742 prevents discontinuity between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401. Can be supplemented. As a result, the effect produced by the school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the light guide plate 715B can be realized as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

Further, since one fish composed of the design 741 and the design 742 is displayed at the boundary between the periphery of the opening 401D of the base 401 and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the game machine, a group of fish that continues in the left direction continues. It can suppress that the nature becomes unnatural in the boundary portion. Similarly, one fish consisting of the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the light guide plate 715B and the base body 701 when viewed from the front of the game machine, so that the continuity of a group of fish facing leftward is concerned. It is also possible to suppress unnaturalness at the boundary.

Further, also on the side wall portion 702, a pattern (not shown) that connects the pattern 741 partly interrupted by the peripheral edge of the opening 401D and the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 is displayed. The discontinuity in the height direction (front-back direction) due to the difference in height between the base body 701 and the base body 701 can be compensated by the pattern displayed on the side wall portion 702. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately suppress unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect produced by a school of fish that faces toward the left and continues.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left or lower right direction is such that the nails 411A and 411B overlapping the front side of the information display unit 753. Or, because it is obstructed by the passage wall portion 1631A and the passage wall portion 1631B, even if the game ball has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611, the player in the case where the start winning of the special symbol is not achieved Discouraged can be suitably suppressed.

On the other hand, since the information display portion 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, when the information display portion 753 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the word “OUT” is displayed. It can be seen sufficiently. Therefore, the information display unit 753, for the player viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the region to which the information display unit 753 is attached is a region in which the start winning of the special symbol does not occur even when the game ball enters. Can be reported appropriately.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the like are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

33A is a front view of the reel device 710 of the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 taken along the line D-D of FIG. 33A. .. FIG. 33C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in the vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 33D is the pressing operation device 261 and the wave motion. It is a top view of the lamp 771.

In FIG. 33B, the light guide plate 715B and the board surface light emitting device 490B are not shown. In addition, in FIG. 33C, the island 10 on which the pachinko machine 100 is installed is also shown. Further, in FIG. 33C, for reference, the head of the player X in the game is shown, and the optical paths of the light emitted by the upper center frame light-emitting device 271 and the press operation device 261 are indicated by a chain double-dashed line. It is illustrated in. 33(b) and 33(c), cross-section hatching is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, on one surface side of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (in this embodiment, the front side of the outer cover 715A), among the effective lines arranged in the vertical direction, A half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B are provided above and below the display area of the middle line, leaving the display area of the middle line. Although the resin cover 715 of the present embodiment has the configuration including the light guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG. 33B), it may be a simple transparent cover without the light guide plate 715B.

The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors, and transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 to the front, while reflecting light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. You can As the half mirrors 761A and 761B, a transparent plate or the like on which aluminum is vapor-deposited can be appropriately used.

In the present embodiment, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured as a hollow cylindrical body having a transparent decorative design drawn on its outer peripheral surface. The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R have a common internal structure, and the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33B, inside the middle reel 711M, three light emitting devices 718A to 718C that irradiate light from inside to a region visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. Is provided.

Among the light emitting devices 718A to 718C, the light emitting device 718A arranged on the uppermost side is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the upper line of the effective line of the symbol on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. It is provided with a light emitting means E6 such as an LED which is oriented slightly upward. By turning on (emits) the light emitting means E6, it is possible to cause the symbols located on the upper line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to be displayed in a luminescent manner.

On the other hand, the light-emitting device 718C arranged at the lowermost side is a light-emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the lower line of the effective line, and is provided with a light-emitting means E8 such as an LED that is directed slightly toward the front. There is. By turning on the light emitting means E8, it is possible to cause the symbols located on the lower line of the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to be displayed in a light emitting manner.

The light-emitting device 718B arranged between the light-emitting device 718A and the light-emitting device 718B is a light-emitting device that irradiates light to the middle line region of the effective line, and emits light from an LED or the like that is directed substantially horizontally forward. Means E7 are provided. By turning on the light emitting means E7, it is possible to cause the symbols located on the middle line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to be displayed in a light emitting manner.

Lighting (light emission) and extinction of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by the sub-control board 940. Therefore, the symbols positioned on the upper line, the symbols positioned on the middle line, and the symbols positioned on the lower line can be independently light-emitted and displayed.

A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A prevents the light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the area of the middle line, and the light emitted by the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) enters the area of the upper line. It has a function to prevent that.

A partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B prevents the light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the area of the lower stage line, and the light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) enters the area of the middle stage line. It has a function to prevent that.

When the light emitting device 718A is turned on (emits light), the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side of the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E6 to the front side, whereby the pattern located on the upper line is changed. It will be visible from the front. On the other hand, in the half mirror 761A at that position, when the light emitting device 718A or the like is turned off, the front side (front side) becomes a mirror because light is not emitted from the back side (rear side). Side) reflects light from.

Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side of the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E8 to the front side, whereby the pattern positioned on the lower line. Can be seen from the front. On the other hand, in the half mirror 761B at that position, when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off, the front side (front side) becomes a mirror because light is not emitted from the back side (rear side), whereby the front side (rear side) Side) reflects light from.

As shown in FIG. 33C, the resin cover 715 that covers the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R projects forward from the base body 701 in an arc shape in a side sectional view. The half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper and lower portions of the resin cover 715 along the surface of the resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A). Therefore, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side is the light emitting device. When the 718A or the like is turned off, it functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front upper side in a side sectional view. Further, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper portion of the resin cover 715 is different from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper central edge portion 211A (see FIG. 5) of the front decorative body 210. It is provided at a position where the emitted light is reflected and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player during the game. Thereby, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G1 of the emitted upper center frame light emitting device 271 reflected on the half mirror 761A as shown in FIG. 33(a). ..

The press operation device 261 of the present embodiment is configured to be turned on (emitted) or turned off under the control of the sub control board 940. In other words, in the pressing operation device 261, the operation unit pressed by the player is configured as a light emitting unit having a light-transmitting property, and the light emitting unit such as an LED provided on the back side of the light emitting unit is provided as a sub-control board. It is turned on or off by being controlled by 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player in the game. It is installed at various positions. Thereby, when the press operation device 261 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G2 of the emitted press operation device 261 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33D, wave lamps 771 are provided on the left and right of the push operation device 261. The wave lamp 771 is composed of three lamps 771A to 771C arranged from the side of the pressing operation device 261 toward the outside. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, the light emitting means overlaps with the front side of the light emitting means. The translucent light emitting unit is configured to be turned on or off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided on the lower side portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (lamps 771A to 771C) and reflects the reflected light during the game. It is provided at a position where the player can see it. Thereby, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G3 of the emitted wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line of the resin cover 715, the light emitting device 718B and the like are constantly turned on to be positioned on the middle line of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. It is possible for the player to always visually recognize the design.

As shown in FIG. 33C, the holding lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B (the side closer to the base body 701). Since the lower half mirror 761B is configured as a convex surface that faces the front lower side in a side sectional view, the light of the holding lamp 720 is likely to be reflected downward by the half mirror 761B, and is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, the visibility of the image G2 (the image of the pressing operation device 261) and the image G3 (the image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B can be suppressed from being hindered by the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B. ..

Further, while the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are located on the front lower side of the resin cover 715, the holding lamp 720 is on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B and the pressing operation device 261. It is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the wave lamp 771.

Therefore, the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be visually recognized in the front side region of the half mirror 761B (the region on the top side of the resin cover 715), while the holding lamp 720 which can be visually recognized by the player. Image is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B, the image of the holding lamp 720 does not easily hinder the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

Although not shown in FIG. 33C, the lottery result display device 730 is also on the rear end side (the side close to the base body 701) of the lower half mirror 761B, similarly to the hold lamp 720. Since it is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, the visibility of the images G2 and G3 is less likely to be hindered by the image of the lottery result display device 730 displayed on the half mirror 761B.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, along the winding direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A partition part 717 having a circular shape is provided. The partition part 717 is fixedly provided so as not to rotate independently of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the area on the front side of the partition part 717, which is the back side of the half mirror 761B. It is provided.

The reel side lamp 717A is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, the reel side having a light transmitting property overlapping the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit as the lamp 717A is configured to be turned on or off.

In the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A has a color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 (same color, specific color, for example) at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. The colors are in correspondence with each other). Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A passing through the half mirror 761B.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing the front upper side in a side sectional view, reflects light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and reflects the reflected light. It is provided at a position where a player who is playing the game can see it. Therefore, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A, without shifting the line of sight to the upper center frame light emitting device 271. It is possible to recognize that 271 emits light and in what color the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits light.

A frame light emitting device such as the upper center frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper center edge portion 211A may emit light as a part of the suggestive effect performed during the period in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed. Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, even when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is illuminated as a part of the suggestive effect, The player can recognize the light emission state of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the lower half mirror 761B, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and the reflected light is played during the game. It is provided at a position visible to the person. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B to shift the line of sight to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Instead, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted light, and in what color the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted light.

The push operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period during which the push operation device 261 can be operated, or a notification period in which the operable period is reported prior to the operable period. As the operable period, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to display a special effect that is one of suggestive effects, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to adjust the volume, or It includes a period during which the push operation device 261 can be operated in order to change the music played during the game.

Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, even if the press operation device 261 is illuminated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the game is played. The person can recognize the light emission state of the press operation device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing (operable time) of the press operating device 261 without noticing the light emission of the press operating device 261.

Like the push operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may also emit light in synchronization with the operable period of the push operation device 261 or the notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is emitted during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player recognizes the light emission state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the player does not notice the light emission of the wave lamp 771 and can prevent the operation time of the pressing operation device 261 from being missed.

In addition, regardless of the operation timing of the press operation device 261, even when the press operation device 261 or the wave lamp 711 is emitted as a part of the suggestion effect, the player sees the variable display of the decorative pattern while watching the half mirror. The suggestive effect can be recognized by visually recognizing the image G2 and the image G3 reflected in the 761B.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A has a color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at the timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Is configured to emit light. Therefore, the notification of the operation time is given not only by the light reflected by the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B) but also from the reel side lamp 717A provided between the reels which is easily noticed by the player. Since the direct light is used, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from missing the notification of the operation time.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 in the case where the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is a basic display area, and FIG. 34(b) is each reel 711L. , 711M, 711R is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is a reduced display area. FIG. 34(c) is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34(d) schematically shows a state in which the display area of the symbol row is reduced. 7 is a top view of the reel device 710 shown in FIG. Note that, in FIGS. 34C and 34D, the gears 781 to 783 are illustrated as circles whose tooth portions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, basically, the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the center axes of the reels are on the same line. As a result, the symbol arrays of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged in a row in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in the basic state. Therefore, in the basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured to have a width of W1 (length in the left-right direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the push operation device 261), the reels 711L, 711M, 711R move, and as a result, FIG. 34(b). As shown in, the width of the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R becomes the length W2 shorter than the length W1. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R by operating the predetermined operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged substantially along the winding direction. A partition part 717 having a circular shape is provided. The two partition parts 717 support the rotation shaft of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

On the rear side of one of the two partition parts 717 (in the present embodiment, the right partition part 717), an extending part 786 is provided that extends across the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M and extends substantially horizontally to the rear side. .. On the right side surface (that is, the surface on the side away from the middle reel 711M) of the right partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth are toothed with respect to the tooth portion of the gear 781 is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Is formed linearly.

The gear 781 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 781 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the partition 717 and the extension 786, whereby the rack gear formed by the partition 717 and the extension 786 and the gear 781 form a rack. By the and-pinion mechanism, the middle reel 711M can be moved in the front-rear direction.

The left reel 711L is provided with an extending portion 787 that extends substantially horizontally to the left from the rotation axis of the left reel 711L. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 787, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth of the gear 782 are toothed is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

The gear 782 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 782 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the extending portion 787, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism by the rack gear formed in the extending portion 787 and the gear 782 causes the left reel 711L. Can be moved left and right.

The right reel 711R is provided with an extending portion 788 that extends substantially horizontally to the right from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 788, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth of the gear 783 are toothed is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

The gear 783 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) whose drive is controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 783 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the extending portion 788, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism by the rack gear formed in the extending portion 788 and the gear 783 causes the right reel 711R. Can be moved left and right.

When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the push operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is shown in FIG. 34(a), first, the gear 781 is As a result, the middle reel 711M moves rearward (in the direction of arrow M1) so as to be behind the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R.

Next, the gear 782 and the gear 783 operate, whereby the left reel 711L moves to the right (arrow M2 direction) and the right reel 711R moves to the left (arrow M3 direction). In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, it is assumed that the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R have substantially the same movement amount.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 34B, the display of the middle reel 711M positioned behind these reels 711L and 711R by the left reel 711L that moves to the right and the right reel 711R that moves to the left. The area is reduced within a range in which the numerical information of the main symbol can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced in the width direction (left-right direction).

In addition, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is shown in FIG. After the reels 711L and 711R are opened to the left and right, the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG. 34(a).

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the push operation device 261). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the left symbol row (left reel 711L) and the right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are the symbol rows that can constitute reach display, are , Which is located on the front side of the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M), whereby the reach display can be displayed with a symbol of the same size as before the reduction of the display area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the reach display from being lost by reducing the display area of each symbol row.

Also, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M moves to the rear side (back side), and the left and right reels 711L, 711R are substantially the same in the direction of approaching each other. Is configured to move a distance of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight when viewing the variable display of the decorative symbols due to the reduction of the display area of each symbol row from moving to the left or right due to the reduction.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 40. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to tenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400X viewed from the front side. Note that, in FIG. 35, the main control device 370 and the sub-control device 390 mounted on the back surface side of the game board 400X are shown together. Further, in FIG. 35, a part of the structures arranged on the front surface side of the base body 401 such as the inner and outer rails 402 and 403 and the nail 411 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the game board 400X, a drum base 801 that holds the reel device 710 is arranged on the back side of the base body 401. A reel device 710 including three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is mounted on the drum base 801 from the rear side (back side) of the drum base 800. The resin cover 715 is attached to the front side of the drum base 801 as a light guide plate unit 810 described later together with the base body 701 and the like.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the drum base 801 as seen from the front side, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 as seen from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 35, the drum base 801 is a resin base having an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the base 401. An opening 801A is formed through the drum base 801 at the position where the reel device 710 is attached. The reel device 710 is mounted on the drum base 801 by inserting the reels 711L, 711M, 711R side from the back side of the opening 801A and fixing them with fixing members (not shown) such as screws.

Substrates 803 on which light emitting means 802 such as LEDs are mounted are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 801A. The light emitting means 802 is located behind the region of the base 401 on which the fish pattern 741 is drawn and the region of the base 701 on which the fish pattern 742 is drawn, and is capable of irradiating light to these regions. It is a means. That is, the light emitting means 802 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E1 (see FIG. 30(b)) and the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. .. Light emission control of the light emitting means 802 is performed by the sub control board 940.

The board 803 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is one of the board surface light emitting device 490A (see FIG. 30B) and the board surface light emitting device 490B (see FIG. 30B) of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. It corresponds to the left and right parts of the reel device 710. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the illustration of the board corresponding to the board surface light emitting device 490C (see FIG. 30B) is omitted.

A holding unit 809 is provided below the opening 801A. The holding unit 809 includes a substrate (not shown) on which the holding lamp 720 and the lottery result display device 730 are mounted, and a light-transmissive cover portion that covers the front surface of the substrate.

A light guide plate unit 810 is arranged in front of the substrate 803 and the holding unit 809. The light guide plate unit 810 includes an outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701, a light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 36) arranged on the rear side of the outer cover 715A, and a curved portion of the light guide plate 715B that bends the outer cover 715A. A pressing member 811 (see FIG. 36) that can be pressed on both the left and right sides of the portion, a light source unit 812 including a light emitting unit (not shown) that irradiates the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B with light, and the light guide plate 715B. And a light source unit 813 including a light emitting means 834 for irradiating light to the lower end surface of the.

On the left and right sides and the upper side of the outer cover 715A of the base 701, a picture sticker 703 and a picture sticker 704 having a fish picture 742 printed with a light-transmitting colored paint are attached to the front surface side. Behind the picture sticker 703, a light emitting means 802 capable of irradiating light toward the picture sticker 703 is located. In addition, behind the picture sticker 704, a light emitting means 825 such as an LED arranged on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822 of the light source unit 812 (see FIG. 36) and capable of emitting light toward the picture sticker 704 is provided. positioned.

By turning on (emits) the light emitting means 802 located on the rear side of the picture sticker 703 and the light emitting means 825 located on the back side of the picture sticker 704, the picture pattern 742 emerging in the light can be displayed. .. The light emitting means 825 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 825 is performed by the sub control board 940.

A region 701A on the back side of the sticking position of the picture sticker 703 on the base 701 is subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, embossing processing) having fine irregularities. Although not shown in FIG. 37 and FIGS. 39 and 40 described later, the region on the back side of the attachment position of the picture sticker 703 on the base 701 is also subjected to the light diffusion processing similar to the region 701A. By performing such light diffusion processing, the entire area of each of the pattern sticker 703 or the pattern sticker 704 can be illuminated by the irradiation light from the light emitting means 802 or the light emitting means 825.

As shown in FIG. 35, on the upper front side of the light guide plate unit 810, a substrate 806 on which light emitting means 804 and light emitting means 805 such as LEDs are mounted is provided. The light emitting means 804 is a light emitting means which is located on the rear side of the upper portion of the central structure 420 and which emits light toward the front. The light emitting means 805 is a light emitting means that is located on the rear side of the upper portion of the central structure 420 in the base 401 and emits light toward the front. Light emission control of these light emitting means 804 and 805 is performed by the sub control board 940. A lens 807 that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting units 804 and 805 is provided on the front side of the substrate 806.

Next, the configuration of the light guide plate unit 810 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 seen from the front side. 39 and 40 are both exploded perspective views of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. 38 and 40, the screws 871A, 871B, 872A, 872B, 881A, 881B, 882A, 882B, 896 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, an outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701 is arranged in front of the light guide plate unit 810. The front surface of the outer cover 715A includes a curved portion 715A1 that curves along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and side portions 715A2 that are continuously provided between the left and right ends of the curved portion 715A1 and the base body 701. Equipped with.

A region 715A3 (a surface on the side facing the reel device 710) on the rear side (back side) of the curved portion 715A1 on which a light diffusion process (for example, graining process) having a fine uneven shape is applied is formed. 39) is provided. Similar to the region 715A3, a strip-shaped region (not shown), which has been subjected to light diffusion processing to make fine unevenness, is also provided on the rear surface on the upper side of the curved portion 715A1.

Note that a region 715A3 formed below the curved portion 715A1 and a band-shaped region similar to the region 715A3 formed above are respectively a lower line L3 (see FIG. 27) and an upper line in a front view of the gaming machine. It is provided so as not to overlap the symbols stopped and displayed on L1 (see FIG. 27). Further, the inner surface of the left and right side portions 715A2 (the surface facing the reel device 710) is also subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, grain processing) having fine irregularities.

Protrusions 891 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward are provided along the left and right edges of the outer cover 715A on the rear (back side) surface of the base body 701 that is connected to the outer cover 715A. There is. A screw hole into which a screw 896 used for fixing the pressing member 811 can be screwed is formed in substantially the center of the protrusion 891. The screw hole and the screw 896 are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is in the front-rear direction, and after the pressing member 811 is arranged at a position separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A, the screw 896 is gradually tightened to tighten the screw 896. , Can be integrated by bringing the relative positions in the front-rear direction closer to each other.

Projections 892 and 893 (see FIG. 39) are provided on the upper and lower sides of the projections 891 provided on the left and right sides of the outer cover 715A so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the base body 701. The two protrusions 892 located on the upper side are protrusions that are respectively inserted into the through holes 843A and 843B (see FIG. 38) of the light source unit 812. On the other hand, the two protrusions 893 located on the lower side are protrusions inserted into the through holes 853A and 853B of the light source unit 813, respectively.

A screw hole into which screws 871A and 871B (see FIG. 39) to be used when fixing the light source unit 812 can be screwed is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 892. On the other hand, a screw hole into which screws 881A and 881B (see FIG. 39) to be used when fixing the light source unit 813 can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 893. These screw holes and the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction, and the light source units 812 and 813 are arranged at positions separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A. , The screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B are fixed (temporarily fixed) so that the light source units 812 and 813 and the outer cover 715A are integrated so as not to be separated from each other in the front and rear, and then are properly aligned in the vertical direction. Alternatively, the deformation of the light guide plate 715B, which will be described later, can be gradually corrected and a complete fixing operation can be performed for integration.

Around the outer cover 715A, a through hole 701B for inserting a screw (not shown) for fixing the light guide plate unit 810 to the drum base 801 is formed. After the assembly of the light guide plate unit 810 is completed, a screw inserted from the rear side of the through hole 701B is screwed into a screw hole (not shown) formed at a predetermined position on the back side of the drum base 801 to guide the screw. The light plate unit 810 can be fixed to the drum base 801.

A light guide plate 715B is disposed behind the outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701. The light guide plate 715B is positioned along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 and is disposed on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and above the curved portion 715B1. The flat portion 715B2 and the flat portion 715B3 located below the curved portion 715B1 are provided. The luminous fish pattern 743 is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the curved portion 715B1.

Here, since the light guide plate 715B is provided along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710, the light guide plate 715B is generally provided on the front side along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710. The fish pattern 743 that is light-emitted and displayed on the bending portion 715B1 can be arranged at positions separated by a certain distance. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position where the fish pattern 743 is displayed in front of the reel device 710 may be greatly displaced. Instead, the fish pattern 743 can be displayed at an appropriate position located a certain distance forward from the surface of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R.

A light source unit 813 that irradiates the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B with light is disposed below the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 813 includes a substrate base 831 arranged on the rear side of the lower plane portion 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 832 held by the substrate base 831, and a reflector arranged on the front side of the plane portion 715B3. And 833.

The substrate base 831 is provided with a recess 831A (see FIG. 38) whose lower side and front side are open so that the substrate 832 can be housed therein, and the substrate 832 is housed and fixed in the recess 831A. On the substrate 832, a plurality of light emitting means 834 are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate 832 along the longitudinal side edge which is the front side of the substrate 832.

The light emitting means 834 is a light emitting means for irradiating the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B with light, and is constituted by a light emitting means having directivity in the light emitting direction (output direction) such as an LED. The light emitting means 834 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 834 is performed by the sub control board 940.

In the state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting means 834 directs the light irradiation direction toward the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B (that is, the upper direction). It is provided so as to line up along the lower end surface 715B4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the plurality of light emitting means 834 project forward from the front surface 831B of the substrate base 831 when the substrate 832 is housed in the recess 831A.

In the reflector 833, a surface 833B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 with the light guide plate 715B sandwiched is a light-impermeable surface whose surface is mirror-finished (for example, chrome plated). Configured as. Similarly, the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface whose surface is mirror-finished. Thus, in the state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 834 emitted from the lower side of the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 is the surface 831B and The light reflected by the surface 833B is guided to the lower end surface 715B4 so that the light can be properly incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B.

A through hole 851A is provided on the left end side of the board base 831 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852A is provided inside the through hole 851A (on the right side of the through hole 851A in the front view of the gaming machine). There is. On the other hand, a through hole 851B is provided on the right end side of the board base 831 in the gaming machine front view, and a through hole 852B is provided inside the through hole 851B (on the left side of the through hole 851B in the gaming machine front view). Has been.

A through hole 853A that communicates with the through hole 851A in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 833 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. On the other hand, a through hole 853B communicating with the through hole 851B in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the right end side of the reflector 833 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Further, a protrusion 854A (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through-hole 853A in the reflector 833 (right side of the through-hole 853A in a front view of the gaming machine). Has been. When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A formed in the lower left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 852A of the substrate base 831. Is.

On the other hand, inside the through hole 853B in the reflector 833 (on the left side of the through hole 853B in the front view of the gaming machine), a protrusion 854B protruding rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When attaching the light source unit 813 to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B formed in the light guide plate 715B at the lower right side of the gaming machine front view and the through hole 852B of the substrate base 831. It is a protrusion.

A screw hole into which the screw 882A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 854A, and a screw hole into which the screw 882B can be screwed is formed in the substantially center of the protrusion 854B. Therefore, after combining the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 so that the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A and the through hole 852A and the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B and the through hole 852B, the screw 882A is protruded. By screwing into the screw hole of the portion 854A and screwing the screw 882B into the screw hole of the protrusion 854B, the light source unit 813 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG.

Here, the screws 882A and 882B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is the front-back direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 882A and 882B, the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are integrated so as not to be separated from each other in the front and rear, and thereafter, the relative positions of the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B. The angle and the angle can be slowly aligned so as not to cause unreasonable deformation, and can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the through hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B, the displacement of the position of the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A with respect to the through hole 862A is hardly permitted in any of the upper, lower, left, and right directions. The protrusion 854A has a substantially circular shape having a size matching the outer diameter of the protrusion 854A. Therefore, the protrusion 854A inserted through the through hole 862A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 862A.

On the other hand, the through-hole 862B has the same maximum height H3 in the vertical direction as the maximum height in the vertical direction of the through-hole 862A, but the maximum width W4 in the horizontal direction is larger than the maximum width W3 in the horizontal direction of the through-hole 862A. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is slightly larger in the left-right direction with respect to the outer diameter of the large protruding portion 854B. Therefore, the protrusion 854B inserted into the through hole 862B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, like the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A. In the horizontal direction with respect to, the allowable positioning range is larger than in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting units 834 provided in the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 formed by the light guide plate 715B. It is possible to make the luminescent display look good with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853A of the reflector 833, and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853B of the reflector 833. .. The screw 881A inserted into the through holes 851A and 853A communicating with each other and the screw 881B inserted into the through holes 851B and 853B communicating with each other are screwed into a protrusion 893 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701. Accordingly, the light source unit 813 fixed to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

As shown in FIG. 39, the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 and the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through hole 853A have a maximum height H5 in the vertical direction larger than a maximum width W5 in the horizontal direction. It is formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the portion 893. The maximum height H5 is larger than the maximum vertical height H3 in the through holes 862A and 862B. Similarly, the through hole 853B of the reflector 833 and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through hole 853B also have the same shape as the through hole 853A, that is, slightly above and below the outer diameter of the protrusion 893. It is configured in the shape of a large oblong hole.

Therefore, the through holes 851A and 853A that communicate with each other and the protrusions 893 that are inserted into the through holes 851B and 853B that communicate with each other have vertical displacements relative to the through holes 851A and 853A or the through holes 851B and 853B in the horizontal direction. Allowed compared to displacement. As a result, the allowable range for positioning the light source unit 813 with respect to the base body 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction.

A light source unit 812 that irradiates the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B with light is disposed above the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 812 includes a substrate base 821 arranged on the rear side of the upper flat portion 715B2 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 822 held by the substrate base 821, and a reflector 823 arranged on the front side of the flat portion 715B2. It has and.

The substrate base 821 includes a recess 821A whose upper side and front side are open so that the substrate 822 can be housed therein. The substrate 822 is housed and fixed in the recess 821A. On the substrate 822, a plurality of light emitting means (not shown) are arranged on the lower surface of the substrate 822 along the longitudinal side edge on the front side of the substrate 822. Note that, hereinafter, for convenience, the light emitting means provided on the lower surface of the substrate 822 is also referred to as “light emitting means 824”.

The light emitting means 824 is a light emitting means that irradiates the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B with light, and is configured by a light emitting means such as an LED having directivity in the light emitting direction (output direction) similar to the light emitting means 834. It The light emitting means 824 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 824 is performed by the sub control board 940.

When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs light to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 (that is, to direct the light downward). ) It is provided so as to line up along the upper end surface 715B5. Therefore, the plurality of light emitting units 824 project forward from the front surface 821B of the substrate base 821 when the substrate 822 is housed in the recess 821A.

Further, the substrate 822 is provided with a light emitting means 825 such as an LED for irradiating light toward the picture sticker 704 (that is, toward the front) on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822.

In the reflector 823, a surface 823B (see FIG. 39) that faces the surface 821B of the substrate base 821 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween is mirror-finished in the same manner as the surface 833B of the reflector 833. Composed as a face. The surface 821B of the substrate base 821 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface. Accordingly, in the state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 824 emitted from the upper side of the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 is the surface 821B and the surface 823B. The light is guided to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B so as to be appropriately incident on the upper end surface 715B5.

A through hole 841A is provided on the left end side of the board base 821 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842A is provided inside the through hole 841A (right side of the through hole 841A in the front view of the gaming machine). There is. On the other hand, a through hole 841B is provided on the right end side of the board base 821 in the front view of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842B is provided inside the through hole 841B (on the left side of the through hole 841B in the front view of the gaming machine). Has been.

A through hole 843A having the same shape as the through hole 841A, which communicates with the through hole 841A in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the left end side of the reflector 823 in a front view of the gaming machine. .. On the other hand, a through hole 843B having the same shape as the through hole 841B, which communicates with the through hole 841B in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the right end side of the reflector 823 in the gaming machine front view. ing.

Further, inside the through hole 843A in the reflector 823 (on the right side of the through hole 843A in the front view of the gaming machine), a protrusion 844A protruding rearward from a rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion portion 844A is a protrusion that is inserted into the through hole 861A formed on the upper left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 842A of the substrate base 821. Is.

On the other hand, inside the through-hole 843B in the reflector 823 (on the left side of the through-hole 843B in the gaming machine front view), a protrusion 844B protruding rearward from a rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844B is a protrusion that is inserted into the through hole 861B formed in the light guide plate 715B on the upper right side of the gaming machine front view and the through hole 842B of the substrate base 821. Is.

A screw hole into which the screw 872A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the protrusion 844A, and a screw hole into which the screw 872B can be screwed is formed in the substantially center of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, after combining the board base 821 and the reflector 823 so that the protrusion 844A is inserted into the through hole 861A and the through hole 842A and the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B and the through hole 842B, the screw 872A is protruded. By screwing the screw 872B into the screw hole of the portion 844A and screwing the screw 872B into the screw hole of the protrusion 844B, the light source unit 812 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG.

Here, the screws 872A and 872B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof is the front-back direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 872A and 872B, the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 are integrated so as not to separate before and after, and thereafter, the relative positions of the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B. The angle and the angle can be slowly aligned so as not to cause unreasonable deformation, and can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation.

The through-hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B is similar to the above-described through-hole 862A such that the displacement of the position of the protrusion 844A inserted into the through-hole 861A with respect to the through-hole 861A is hardly permitted in any of the upper, lower, left and right directions. The projection 844A has a substantially circular shape having a size that matches the outer diameter of the projection 844A. Therefore, the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 861A.

Similarly to the above-described through hole 862B, the through hole 861B is also formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the left-right direction with respect to the outer diameter of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, the protrusion 844B inserted into the through hole 861B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, like the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A. In the horizontal direction with respect to, the allowable positioning range is larger than in the vertical direction. Thereby, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 824 provided in the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made to be substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B, It is possible to make it look good with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 841A of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843A of the reflector 823, and the through hole 841B of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843AB of the reflector 823. .. A screw 871A inserted into the communicating through holes 841A and 843A and a screw 871B inserted into the communicating through holes 841B and 843B are screwed into a protrusion 892 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701. Accordingly, the light source unit 812 fixed on the upper side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

The through holes 843A and 843B of the reflector 823, and the through holes 841A and 841B of the substrate base 821 corresponding to the through holes 843A and 843B, respectively, are the same as the above-described through holes 853A, 853B, 841A and 841B. It is formed in an elongated hole shape which is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the portion 892. Therefore, the allowable range for positioning the light source unit 812 with respect to the base body 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, as in the case of the light source unit 813 described above.

On the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, pressing members 811 are arranged on both left and right ends of the light guide plate 715B. The pressing member 811 is provided on the right or left side in a front view of the gaming machine from a pressing portion 811A configured to have a curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and a frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. And a mounting portion 811B. The mounting portion 811B is provided at a position corresponding to the protrusion 891 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701, and a through hole communicating with the screw hole of the protrusion 891 is formed. Therefore, the pressing member 811 can be fixed to the base body 701 by screwing the screw 896 inserted into the through hole of the mounting portion 811B into the screw hole of the protrusion 891.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, after the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed is arranged on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, the screw is applied. Prior to fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base body 701 by 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the left and right pressing members 811 are fixed to the base body 701 with screws 896.

The pressing portion 811A is a portion for pressing the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B against the curved portion 715A1 (toward the curved portion 715A1) when the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701. The pressing portion 811A is configured to have a front end portion that follows the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. Therefore, when the pressing member 811 is fixed (attached) to the base body 701, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is removed from the predetermined gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A. If it is deformed, the pressing portion 811A presses the left and right ends of the bending portion 715B1, and the shape of the bending portion 715B1 is held in a corrected state to match the shape of the bending portion 715A1.

Here, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B does not necessarily have to come into contact with at least one of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811, and when a deformation of a certain amount or more occurs. The design size may be set so that it contacts only for a limited time, or the size may be set so that it always contacts either one.

Further, when the left and right holding members 811 are fixed to the base body 701 with the screws 896, the gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811 has screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B on the rear side. The screw 896 is fixed such that the screw 896 becomes narrower as it is fixed. Therefore, the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811 can gradually correct a certain amount or more of the deformation of the bending portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. Since the force due to the tightening of the screw 896 can be utilized, the worker can easily perform the work of attaching the pressing member 811 while suppressing damage to the light guide plate 715B and the like.

The holding member 811 is formed in a mesh shape having an opening through which light can pass from one surface to the other surface between the holding portion 811A and the frame portion connecting both ends of the holding portion 811A. Light emitted from the reel device 710 and the light guide plate 715B inside the member 811 passes to the outside via the pressing member 811. The side portion 715A2 of the outer cover 715A emits light by the light.

In the present embodiment, as described above, before the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 896. However, the light source units 812 and 813 are temporarily fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, then the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 by the screws 896, and then the screws 871A, 871B, The light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base 701 by 881A and 881B. By performing temporary fixing with screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the position of the light guide plate 715B with respect to the outer cover 715A can be generally positioned, so that the light guide plate 701B can be accurately attached.

Further, the screws 872A, which integrate the light source units 812, 813 and the light guide plate 715B, within the range of the four corners at which the light source units 812, 813 are fixed to the base 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. A fixed position is provided where 872B, 882A, 882B are arranged. Specifically, the light source unit 812 is fixed to the base body 701 near each of the two screws 872A and 872B for integrating the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B, on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 872A and 872B. Fixed positions (screws 871A, 871B) are provided. Further, a fixing position for fixing the light source unit 813 to the base body 701 near each of the two screws 882A and 882B for integrating the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B, on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 882A and 882B. (Screws 881A, 881B) are provided. Therefore, the integrated shape of the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B makes it easy to hold the light source unit 813 without changing it in a situation where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the base body 701, and suppresses the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B. The fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be luminescently displayed with good appearance.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 841A, 843A and the through holes 841B, 843B formed on both the left and right sides of the upper light source unit 812 are arranged above and below the outer diameter of the protrusion 892 formed on the base body 701. It has a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the direction. Similarly, the through holes 851A, 853A and the through holes 851B, 853B formed on both the left and right sides of the lower light source unit 813 are also vertically arranged with respect to the outer diameter of the protrusion 893 formed on the base body 701. It is composed of a slightly large oblong hole.

Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the base body 701 is relatively allowed in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B is continuous (vertical direction), so that the light source units 812 and 813 mounted vertically are guided. By fixing the light plate 715B to the base body 701 via the light source units 812 and 813, even if the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to the deformation. Displacement in the direction in which the plate surface of is continuous (vertical direction) is allowed. Therefore, in order to suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide plate 715B including the curved portion, even if a large variation in the manufacturing of the light guide plate 715B is allowed, when the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the base body 701 and the outer cover 715A, it is curved. It is possible to suppress a vertical load (that is, a force that stretches or compresses the curved portion 715B1) from being applied to the portion 715B1, and it is possible to suppress damage to the light guide plate 715B when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right of the upper side of the light guide plate 715B are both the protrusions 844A of the light source unit 812 inserted into the through holes 861A and 861B. , 844B with respect to the vertical displacement of the position. Similarly, the through-holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right below the light guide plate 715B are also vertically positioned above and below the projections 854A and 854B of the light source unit 813 inserted into the through-holes 862A and 862B. The displacement is so small that it is hardly allowed.

Therefore, the light source units 812 and 813 can be positioned and integrated with the light guide plate 715B at suitable positions in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B is continuous (vertical direction). Thereby, the position of the light emitting means 824 with respect to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B and the position of the light emitting means 834 with respect to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 39) are both suitable. Since they can be matched, the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B due to the displacement of the light emitting means 824 or the light emitting means 834 can be suppressed, and the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be displayed in a light emitting manner with a good appearance.

It should be noted that, of the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right on the upper side of the light guide plate 715B, one of the through holes 861A has a size such that the displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844A in the left and right direction is hardly permitted. On the other hand, the other through-hole 861B is configured such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844B is relatively allowed. Similarly, of the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the lower left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B, one through hole 862A also has a size in which the displacement in the left and right direction with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854A is hardly permitted. On the other hand, the other through hole 862B is configured such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854B is relatively allowed.

Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error in the installation position of the protrusions 844A and 844B in the light source unit 812 or the installation position of the protrusions 854A and 854B in the light source unit 813, the manufacturing error is caused by the through hole 861B or the through hole 862. It can be absorbed by the lateral displacement allowed by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manufacturing error of the protrusions 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after pressing the left and right sides of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B on which the light source units 812 and 813 are mounted vertically to the curved portion 715A1 with the pressing member 811, the light source The units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701.

Therefore, since the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A in a state where the shape of the bend portion 715B1 is corrected in advance to the shape of the bend portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811, the bend of the light guide plate 715B. Even when the portion 715B1 is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, when the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701, a vertical load is applied to the bending portion 715B1 (that is, the bending portion 715B1 is stretched or compressed). Force) can be suppressed. Also in this respect, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment is characterized by how the light guide plate 715B shines. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eleventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

41A is a schematic diagram for explaining the traveling direction of light that has entered the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the light guide plate 715B showing an example of how light is emitted. Is.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B is smaller than the left/right width of one light emitting means 834 in a front view (or a direction view along the thickness direction of the light guide plate 715B). A plurality of trapezoidal recesses Z having a width are formed in a continuous shape. The lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has trapezoidal recesses Z formed in the left and right widths smaller than the light irradiation width of one light emitting means 834. In addition, a plurality of recesses Z are formed in the shape. The plurality of recesses Z are preferably provided in an amount of 5 or more, and more preferably 10 or more, within the irradiation width of light by one light emitting unit 834. The width of the trapezoid forming each recess Z is preferably set to 0.5 mm or less, and more preferably 0.1 mm or less.

The recess Z has a side Z1 that is a bottom of the recess Z and extends substantially horizontally, a side Z2 that is connected to the left end C1 of the side Z1 and extends in the lower left direction, and a side Z2 that is connected to the right end C2 of the side Z1 and extends in the lower right direction. And an extending side Z3.

As described above, the light emitting means 834 arranged on the lower side of the end face 715B4 is configured by a light emitting means having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction) such as the LED. Therefore, the side Z1 of the recess Z is substantially orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (output direction) of the light emitting means 834 in the state where the light source unit 813 is attached to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is incident on the side Z1 of the recess Z substantially perpendicularly, the light incident from the side Z1 is in a direction substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 (direction of arrow F1). Proceed inside the light guide plate 715B.

Since the light guide plate 715B is made of a resin having a refractive index (absolute refractive index) larger than 1, such as acrylic resin, the light guide plate 715B enters from the side Z2 or the side Z3 inclined with respect to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834. Light is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incident angle φ1)/sin (refractive angle φ2))=(refractive index of light guide plate 715B/refractive index of air). In this case, the incident angle φ1 is the incident angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B (side Z2 or side Z3) from the air, and the refraction angle φ2 is the refraction angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B. ..

For example, when the light guide plate 715B is made of acrylic resin, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is about 1.5 which is the refractive index of the acrylic resin. In the following, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is calculated as 1.5 for convenience. On the other hand, since the refractive index of air is approximately 1 (hereinafter, the refractive index of air is 1 for convenience), the light incident from the side Z2 or the side Z3 is (sin(incident angle φ1)/sin( Refraction according to the relationship of refraction angle φ2))=1.5.

The incident angle φ1 of the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z is equal to the angle θ1 of the angle formed by the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction of the recess Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally, that is, the incident angle φ1=angle. Since it is θ1, the refraction angle φ2 of the light incident from the side Z2 is a value of φ2 that satisfies sin(refraction angle φ2)=(sin(angle θ1)/1.5). For example, when the angle θ1 is about 41°, the refraction angle φ2 is about 26°.

That is, when the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction and the side Z1 is approximately 41°, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is approximately 41° with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z in the light guide plate 715B. At an angle of incidence of φ1 and refracted at a refraction angle of φ2 of approximately 26°, and travels in the light guide plate 715B in the direction of arrow F2. Thus, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41°, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (arrow F2 direction) is leftward with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). The direction is inclined by an angle θ2 of about 15°.

The magnitude of the angle θ2 changes according to the magnitude of the angle θ1. Therefore, by changing the angle formed by the two adjacent sides Z1 and Z2 in the recess Z (that is, the angle θ1), the angle formed by the traveling directions of the lights respectively incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the angle θ1). , Angle θ2) can be changed. For example, by setting the angle θ1 formed by the sides Z1 and Z2 to be approximately 60°, the angle θ2 formed by the traveling directions of the lights respectively incident from the sides Z1 and Z2 can be made approximately 25°. it can.

As for the side Z3 of the recess Z, similarly to the side Z2, the incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z3 is equal to the angle formed by the side Z3 inclined in the lower right direction of the recess Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally. .. Therefore, according to the angle of the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z3 (arrow F3 direction) can be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). ..

In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the angle formed by the side Z1 and the side Z3 is configured to be equal to the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2, so that the light is incident from the side Z1 and the side Z3, respectively. The angle formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights is equal to the angle θ2 of the angles formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2. Therefore, when the angle θ2 is approximately 15°, the light incident from the concave portion Z travels in the direction (arrow F1 direction) substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834 and to the left and right with respect to the light. It is separated into light traveling in a direction inclined by approximately 15° (directions of arrow F2 and arrow F3). The angle θ1 formed by the sides Z1 and Z2 and the angle θ2 formed by the sides Z1 and Z3 do not necessarily have to be the same.

Since the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (direction of arrow F2) intersect at an angle θ2, the intersection of the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the side In a region D1 extending from the left end C1 of Z1 at an angle θ3 equal to the angle θ2, a region (or an arrow F1 direction or an arrow F2 direction) in which neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z2 enters Light is weaker than the light that travels to the area).

Similarly, since the traveling direction of light incident from side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of light incident from side Z3 (direction of arrow F3) intersect at a predetermined angle, the intersection of side Z1 and side Z3. (In other words, the region D2 extending from the right end C2 of the side Z1 at an angle equal to the angle is also a region in which neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z3 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or This is a region where light weaker than the light advancing in the direction of arrow F3 enters.

By continuously providing the plurality of recesses Z described above on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, the light incident from the lower side of the light guide plate 715B is separated into three directions as shown in FIG. 41(b). The inside of the light guide plate 715B can be moved upward.

That is, the light radiated to the range K1 of the end surface 715B4 enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K1 and is in the arrow F1 direction (that is, a direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834). ), a band-shaped region 981A formed by light traveling in the direction Z), a band-shaped region 981B formed by light incident from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2, and a band-shaped region 981B incident from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F3. A band-shaped region 981C formed by light is formed.

It should be noted that the light that is incident from the lower end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B is guided so as to almost escape from the light guide plate 715B when it exceeds the apex X of the curved portion 715B1 that projects and curves forward. The curvature of the optical plate 715B and the plate thickness may be set. In this case, the light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C disappears around the apex X of the curved portion 715B1 and does not reach the upper portion. Further, it is preferable that the light irradiation intensity of the light emitting means 834 is set so that the light incident from the end face 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B can reach at least the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

When the light emitting means 834 is configured by a light emitting means capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with light of a predetermined color (for example, red light), the regions 981A and 981B, The light of the color can be made to travel in the area 981C. Therefore, when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light, only the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. Is displayed in red by the red light traveling upward in these areas 981A, 981B, 981C.

Further, as described above, since the recess Z is configured to form the regions D1 and D2 where the irradiation light from the light emitting unit 834 does not enter, the end surface 715B4 is formed between the regions 981A and 981B. A region 982 in which the light applied to the range K1 does not travel is formed. Similarly, a region 983 in which the light applied to the range K1 does not travel is formed between the regions 981A and 981BC. Therefore, in the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1, the area 982 and the portion within the area 983 are not luminescently displayed by the light applied to the range K1. As a result, for example, when the range K1 is irradiated with red light, the range between the region 981B and the region 98C can be luminescently displayed in a mottled red color.

When a color (for example, blue light) different from the color of the range K1 is irradiated to the range K2 of the end surface 715B4 different from the range K1, the light is incident from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K2. Then, a strip-shaped region 983A composed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C traveling in the arrow F1 direction and light of different colors from the regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the arrow F2 direction. It is possible to form a band-shaped region 983B configured by the above and a band-shaped region 983C configured by light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C which enter from the side Z3 and proceed in the direction of the arrow F3.

Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, only the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. In the areas 983A, 983B, 983C, the blue light is emitted and displayed in blue by the blue light traveling upward.

When the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light and the light emitting means 834 irradiates with the range K2 blue light, the regions 981A and 981B of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1. , 981C and the regions where the regions 983A, 983B, 983C overlap each other, the red light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, 981C and the blue light traveling in the regions 983A, 983B, 983C are mixed and displayed in purple. ..

As for the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B, by providing a trapezoidal recess Z in a front view similar to the above-described lower end surface 715B4, as shown in FIG. 41(b), from the upper side of the light guide plate 715B. The incident light can be separated into three directions and can be moved downward in the light guide plate 715B.

That is, the light radiated to the range K3 of the end surface 715B5 enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K3 and is in the arrow F1 direction (that is, the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 824). ), a strip-shaped region 991A formed by light traveling in the direction ), a strip-shaped region 991B formed by light incident in the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2, and a strip-shaped region 991B incident in the direction Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F3. A band-shaped region 991C formed by light is formed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 41(b), the recess Z formed in the upper end surface 715B5 is in the light traveling direction in the region 991A (that is, the arrow F1 direction). And an angle formed by each of the light traveling directions in the region 991B or 991C (that is, the directions of the arrows F2 and F3) is between the light traveling direction in the region 981A and each light traveling direction in the region 981B or the region 981C. It is set to be different from the angle formed. That is, in the recess Z formed in the upper end surface 715B5, the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 is the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 in the recess Z formed in the lower end surface 715B4. Is set to be different from.

An angle formed by the traveling direction of light in the region 991A (that is, arrow F1 direction) and each traveling direction of light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, arrow F2 and F3 directions) is defined as the traveling direction of light in the region 981A. , The angle formed by each traveling direction of light in the region 981B or the region 981C can be randomized in the light emission display of the fish pattern 743 in the curved portion 715B1, and the light emission display of the pattern 743 is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41B, the light irradiated to the range K4 located on the left end side in the front view of the gaming machine on the end surface 715B5 is from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K4. Light guiding that separates into two directions, a band-shaped region 993A formed by light that enters and travels in the direction of arrow F1 and a band-shaped region 931B formed by light that enters from side Z2 and travels in the direction of arrow F2. Is configured.

In this light guiding, the side Z3 (that is, the side on the left end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) of the recess Z included in the range K4 is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1 (that is, the light emitting means 824). Can be realized by making the shape substantially parallel to the irradiation direction of light.

Even if the light emitted from the light emitting means 824 to the range K4 is guided to the left in the gaming machine front view, the light exits from the left end of the light guiding plate 715B in the gaming machine front view before reaching the bending portion 715B1. Therefore, it is meaningless to guide the light in that direction. Therefore, by guiding the light in the two directions of the region 993A and the region 993B, the light emitted by the light emitting unit 824 can be transmitted to the bending portion 715B1 without waste.

It should be noted that the same range as the range K4 located on the right end side in the front view of the gaming machine on the end surface 715B5 is also constituted by light that enters the recess Z included in the range from the side Z1 and proceeds in the direction of the arrow F1. Alternatively, the light may be guided in two directions, that is, a strip-shaped region and a strip-shaped region formed by light that enters from the side Z3 and travels in the direction of arrow F3. That is, the recess Z included in the range may have a shape in which the side Z2 (that is, the side on the right end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1.

Further, regarding the lower end surface 715B4 as well, in a predetermined range on the left and right end sides in the front view of the gaming machine, the shape of the recess Z included in the range is incident from the side Z1 similarly to the recess Z included in the range K4. Then, the light is guided in two directions, that is, a strip-shaped region formed by the light traveling in the arrow F1 direction and a strip-shaped region formed by the light incident from the side Z2 or Z3 and traveling in the arrow F2 direction or the arrow F3 direction. It may be configured to shine.

Next, operations and effects of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper end surface 715B5 and the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B are formed in a shape in which a plurality of trapezoidal recesses Z are continuous in a front view, and thus the light emitting means 824 is provided. , 825 includes a predetermined direction (direction in which the regions D1 and D2 are formed) in which the light incident on the light guide plate 715B does not travel, or travels as relatively weak light, and with respect to the predetermined direction, The light is emitted from the light emitting means 824, 825 so that the light is emitted more strongly than the portion extending in the predetermined direction in the areas on both sides inclined to the one and the other with respect to the light emitting means 824, 825 (for example, the areas 981A, 981C for the area 982). Light can travel (guide) in the light guide plate 715B. Therefore, since the light guide plate 715B can have randomness in how it shines, it is possible to prevent the light emission display of the pattern 743 from being monotonous, thereby making it possible to diversify the display mode of the light guide plate 715B. ..

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each of the above embodiments, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

(1) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment In the above-described first embodiment, information such as the lottery result of each special effect lottery is stored for the variable display of the decorative symbol that is being executed. However, the variation of a plurality of (for example, four) decorative symbols including the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed. For each display, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery may be stored every time the variable display of each decorative symbol is executed. In this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as results shall be stored.

In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a big hit, in the special game state transitioned to after that, the player has a fixed stop of the big symbol. Not only the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display, but by restoring the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern performed before the variable display of the decorative pattern, until the transition to the special game state You can know the history of suggestive production of.

Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect can be restored in the special game state, but the time when the suggestion effect can be restored need not be limited to the special game state. The display may be configured to restore the suggestive effect that was able to appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was executed before the variable display, so-called "customer waiting effect" (that is, the pachinko machine 100 is It may be configured to use during the period of effect display irrelevant to the game state such as title display and demo display, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a predetermined time has not been played by the player. ..

In this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, lottery of each special effect lottery You may make it memorize|store information, such as a result.

In the first embodiment, the suggestive effect that can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored. However, it is performed by using the image showing the hold status displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state with respect to each hold (that is, each held right of each unit game) may be restored. That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be restored including the suggestive effect that can appear before the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and thus, the start winning even before the variable display is started. The variable display can be restored over a long period of time after the occurrence of. In this case, when the color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the color of the reserved display as the information to be stored in the predetermined area of the RAM regarding the variable display of the decorative pattern performed before the transition to the special game state being executed. In addition, the information corresponding to the color for each hold display in, the number of holds at the timing when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot win, and the information about the variable display executed every time the hold is exhausted, It is preferable that the control board 940 stores the data because the process until the big hit can be reproduced more accurately.

Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect selected from a plurality of types is displayed by operating the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. A plurality of operable operation modes may be set, and a plurality of types of suggestive effects may be associated with each operation mode.

In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in any one of the plurality of operation modes during the operable period, a plurality of suggestive effects associated with the operated operation mode are displayed. The suggestive effect selected from the inside may be displayed. For example, when a right operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, one of the plurality of types of patterns that form the suggestive effect associated with the operation is selected. When the pattern appears and the left operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 in the same operable period, the pattern is selected from a plurality of types of patterns that form the suggestive effect associated with the operation. The pattern of 2 may appear.

As described above, when operations in a plurality of different operation modes are possible in the same operable period, one operation mode (for example, the selection operation device 263 with respect to the selection operation device 263 is selected from the plurality of operation modes during the operable period. By performing the operation in the rightward direction, it is inevitable that the suggestive effect that is seen by the operation in another operation mode (for example, the leftward operation on the selection operation device 263) cannot be seen. On the other hand, by making it possible to restore the suggestive effect that can appear in the operable period later, the player can also see the suggestive effect in which the appearing is exclusive, so that the player can be satisfied. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the image effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is illustrated as the suggestive effect, but the suggestive effect is not limited to the image effect. For example, effects by sounds (voices, music) output from the audio devices 281 and 282, effects by lights output from the various light-emitting devices 490 and 271 to 275, effects by operation of a structure that is operably provided, and the like. May be an element of suggestive production.

Different suggestion effects may be configured depending on a combination of elements such as an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by operation of a structure. In this case, depending on the operation mode during the operable period, the suggestive effect having different included elements may be displayed. For example, when the right operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, a suggestion effect including an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by operation of a structure is displayed, and the selection operation is performed. When a leftward operation is performed on the device 263, a suggestive effect including an image effect and a sound effect is displayed, and when an upward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, an image effect is generated. You may make it show the suggestive production comprised only.

(2) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Second Embodiment In the second embodiment described above, the next operable period from after the end of the special effect (first special effect, second special effect) that is the suggested effect. Although the cancelable period (the first cancelable period, the second cancelable period) is provided before the start of the (second operable period, the third operable period), but after the suggestive effect is finished. It may be configured such that a cancelable period is provided between the time and the start of the next suggestive effect.

Alternatively, the operation device for instructing execution of the suggestive effect and the operation device for instructing cancellation of execution of the suggestive effect may be different operation devices, and the operable period may also serve as the cancelable period. In a configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, the process corresponding to the operating device operated first in the period (that is, execution of suggestive effect or cancellation of execution of suggestive effect) is performed. Alternatively, the process corresponding to the operating device operated last in the period may be performed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel the second or subsequent suggestion effect execution among the plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during one variable display by the suggestion effect cancel function. Although the configuration has been described, a cancelable period may be provided before or immediately after the start of the variable display, and the execution of all the suggestive effects that can appear while the variable display is performed may be canceled.

In the second embodiment, the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display with the operable period (that is, the suggestive effect that appears when the player operates) is canceled by the suggestive effect canceling function. Although the configuration is possible, the player may cancel the suggestive effect that automatically appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern regardless of the operation of the player by the suggestive effect canceling function.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the press operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent operable period is not generated so that the subsequent suggestive effect is not displayed. Although the subsequent operable period is generated, the subsequent suggestion effect may not be displayed by invalidating the operation of the player in the operable period.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed, but the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period. When is operated, a suggestion effect having a lower probability of occurrence of a special game state than the suggestion effect that appears before the cancelable period may be displayed.

(3) Modified Example of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to Third and Fourth Embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the push operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the operable period. Although the suggestion effect corresponding to is displayed on another area of the decorative pattern display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100 or the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100, which is the own machine, the press operation device 261. All the variable display of the decorative pattern after the is operated are displayed in another area on the decorative pattern display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100 or the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own device. May be In addition, in the configuration in which all the variable displays of the decorative symbols after the pressing operation device 261 is operated are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 100 of the other pachinko machine 100 is operated during the subsequent operable period. The configuration may be such that it can be operated using an operating device (such as the pressing operation device 261).

(4) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, as the reserved full tank production selection table, each of the numbers of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number. The first table referred to when it is the first time in the hold count monitoring period, the second table referred to when the second time is reached, the third table referred to when the third time is reached, and 4 The fourth table to be referred to when it is the second time or later is prepared, but each of these tables (first table, second table, third table) is in a special symbol lottery during suspension. It may be divided into a hit time table that is referred to when the winning hold is included, and a miss time table that is referred to when the held special prize lottery is not included in the hold Good.

By having a table at the time of hitting and a table at the time of disengagement, in the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, compared to the case where the hold held in the special symbol lottery is not included Since the hold full tank effect is easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the hold full tank effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved more suitably.

(5) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to sixth embodiment In the sixth embodiment described above, by performing complete loss variation display (variation display not including reach display) multiple times, variation display including reach display is performed. Although the variable display of the corresponding variable display time is performed, the complete loss variable display of the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display may be exclusively prepared.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol is held for the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) while being reserved. If there is a pending lottery in the lottery, it is configured to execute a variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display. A variable display that does not include the reach display and that has a variable display time shorter than the display may be executed.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, when the special symbol lottery is held in the hold for the special symbol, Is configured to make it easier to store the hold by executing the variable display including the variable display that does not include the reach display multiple times with the predetermined probability for the same variable display time as the selected variable display. The configuration for facilitating is not limited to this.

For example, when the entrance portion of the starting device according to the special symbol is provided with an entry restricting mechanism that changes the probability of the game ball entering the inside of the starting device, the posture of the entrance restricting mechanism is set to the inside of the starting device. It may be possible to make it easier to store the hold by changing the posture so that the game ball easily enters (or allows the game ball to enter the inside). Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the reach display is performed until the middle symbol is finally stopped, the period during which the player can stop the firing of the game ball is shortened, thereby making it easier to accumulate the hold. You can

Further, in the sixth embodiment, if there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), if there is no reserved hold Compared with, the variable display time may be selected based on the condition that the variable display for a long time is easily selected as the variable display of the decorative pattern.

(6) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is a drum formed in a cylindrical shape, but each reel 711L, 711M. , 711R may be a revolving belt in which a decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface and which is rotated by driving a roller.

In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol warning or countdown warning is performed by using the variable display (that is, the variable display of the decorative symbol due to the fluctuation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R) performed in the reel device 710. However, the pre-reading effect such as the second sub-symbol warning notice or the countdown notice may be configured to be performed by using the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the timing of stop display in the lottery result display device 730 arrives during the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being executed, the variable display time of the lamp fluctuation display is displayed. By extending, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is removed from the reach production period. The configuration for removing the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 from the reach production period is not limited to the above method, and for example, the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes before the reach production period. As described above, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be shortened.

Alternatively, by shortening the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed without changing the variable display time of the lamp variable display, the timing at which the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 is changed from the reach production period. It may be removed. In such a modified example, since the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is shortened, the lottery result of the pending full tank effect lottery can be promptly shown while showing the suggestive effect executed in the reach effect period to the player. I can show you.

Further, when the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed comes during the execution of the prefetching effect using a plurality of variable displays, the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed is the prefetching effect. The variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended so as to arrive after the variable display of the pre-reading target in FIG.

In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading effect has been determined or during the execution of the pre-reading effect, it is confirmed that the predetermined special effect display is being executed or that the special effect display is being executed. If so, the sub-control board 940 may be provided with control for selecting not to execute the reserved full tank effect.

In addition, the lottery result display device is performed at the time when the effect performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 and the effect performed by displaying the image on the resin cover configured as the light guide plate in the reel device 710 are executed. The execution period of the effect may be adjusted or the variable display time of the lamp variable display may be adjusted so that the stop display is not performed in 730.

In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol notice, the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target is changed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the variable display of the prefetch target. Although the fluctuation is started in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2, the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is the end time of the fluctuation display of the prefetch target (that is, stopped display). It may be configured to start a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) before the time.

The variation of the stopped middle reel 711M is not limited to be started in synchronization with the occurrence of the reach display, and is performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271-275, or as a light guide plate in the reel device 710. The configuration may be started in synchronism with the effect performed by displaying an image on the resin cover configured.

In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor advance notice, in the variation display prior to the variation display of the prefetch target, the second sub-symbol 713B (that is, a symbol that does not form a jackpot symbol) is displayed in the middle line L2. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state, the left and right reels 711L, 711L, while maintaining the second sub-pattern 713 of the middle reel 711M in the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the variation display in the variation display thereafter. 711R is changed.

Instead of this, or in addition to this, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed in the middle line L2 with a symbol that does not form a reach display, In the variable display, the middle reel 711M may be changed while maintaining the symbols of the middle line L2 on the left and right reels 711L and 711R from the beginning to the end of the variable display.

In this configuration, in the variable display two or more before the prefetch target, the changing middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state in which the second sub symbol 713B or the first sub symbol 713A is displayed in the middle line L2, In the next change display, the middle reel 711M is changed again. After that, in the previous variable display of the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed while the main symbol 712 is displayed on the middle line L2, and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped while the middle reel 711M is stopped. It fluctuates, and one reel (for example, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the reel displayed on the middle line L2 can constitute a reach display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After stopping one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the other reel is stopped.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor announcement, the decorative symbols of the left reels 711L, 711M, 711R, main symbols 712 and sub-symbols 713 (713A, 713B) are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. However, for the left reel 711L stopped next to the middle reel 711M, three or more sub-designations 713 are continuously arranged between the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712, or "3" is attached. A plurality of sub-designs 713 may be continuously arranged between the main design 712 and the main design 712 marked with "5".

According to this configuration, by arranging the continuous sub-patterns 713 on the left reel 711R on the middle line L2 while the second sub-pattern 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the upper line L1. In each of the middle line L2 and the lower line L3, it is possible to prevent the reach display from being formed by the symbol on the left reel 711L and the symbol on the middle reel 711R.

In the seventh embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M is used to give the second sub symbol warning, but the second sub symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. Alternatively, the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R may be used to perform a pre-reading effect similar to the second sub-symbol predictor announcement.

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is the main symbol 712 displayed when the middle reel 711M is finally stopped. However, the countdown may be performed by a temporary stop during the change.

In the seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are all symbols including numbers, but for the left reels 711L, 711R that do not count down in the countdown notice, the main symbols 712 are used. However, you may be comprised from the pattern containing the numerical information other than a number. Further, for the middle reel 711M that performs the countdown in the countdown notice, the main symbol 712 is a symbol including a number (eg, "3", "2", "1") that may be used for the countdown notice in the countdown notice. , May be composed of a pattern including numerical information other than numbers, and is preferably composed of a pattern including at least “1” and “2”.

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M, but the countdown is performed. The reel is not limited to the middle reel 711M, but may be the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the countdown notice is configured to display the number of times of the variable display during the prefetching effect that is being executed until the variable display of the prefetching target is executed by the countdown. The notice effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display is executed, and the main symbol 712 may be used for counting up in the countup notice (for example, “1”, “2”). , "3") may be included.

(7) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment described above, a group of fish facing leftward and continuous is displayed on both sides of the reel device 710. It may be on the right side or the left side only.

In the eighth embodiment, the region J is a part of the light-transmitting substrate 401, but the light-transmitting region J is formed on the substrate having no light transmitting property. May be

In the eighth embodiment, when the player playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction, a part of the passage forming member 1631 (passage wall portions 1631A and 1631B) overlaps the front side of the information display portion 753 on the left side. However, the dedicated member that obstructs the visibility of the information display unit 753 may be configured to overlap the front side of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left direction.

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2 after entering from the entrance 1611 is detected by the starting prize switch 1441A, 1411B, a special symbol starting prize ( That is, the special symbol lottery condition) is established. Instead, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2 is detected by the detection unit, a certain number of game balls are awarded as prize balls (privilege) without satisfying the lottery conditions. May be.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game ball entering from the entrance 1611 enters the second passages 1614A and 1614B, the special symbol starting winning is not established, but when entering the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A less valuable privilege (for example, the number of prize balls, a winning probability of a special symbol lottery, or a game state after winning a special symbol lottery) may be provided.

(8) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B has an arc shape in a side cross-sectional view. It suffices that the half mirrors 761A and 761B have a shape that faces the upper front side and the lower front side, respectively. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a shape having at least a slope that faces the upper front side and a slope that faces the lower front side, such as a trapezoidal shape in a sectional view, and a convex surface that faces the upper front side and the lower surface that faces the front side. It may have a shape including a convex surface and a flat surface provided between the convex surfaces.

Although the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the resin cover 715 in the ninth embodiment, the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B is provided on either the upper side or the lower side of the resin cover 715. It may be provided.

In the ninth embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the area that is the back side of the lower half mirror 761B. However, in addition to or instead of this, the back side of the upper half mirror 761A is provided. A reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided in the area. Further, a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided on the entire front side of the partition section 717.

In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. However, the pressing operation device is provided on the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479. In order to allow the player to visually recognize the image G2 and the like formed by the reference numeral 261, a protrusion having an arc shape in a side sectional view may be provided, and the half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the protrusion.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 is configured to be able to light (emit), but the pressing operation device 261 may not emit light. Even if the press operation device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the press operation device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment described above, in the reel device 710 that performs variable display of decorative symbols by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the display area of each symbol row is changed. Although the case of reducing the size is illustrated, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle symbol column is reduced, and the left and right symbol columns are moved so as to be arranged on both sides of the reduced middle symbol column. You can

In the tenth embodiment, after moving the middle reel 711M backward, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved toward the middle reel 711M. However, the position of the middle reel 711M is left unchanged. The reels 711L and 711R may be moved rearward and then moved in a direction of approaching the middle reel 711M.

Alternatively, while keeping the position of the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M is moved rearward so as to be behind the left reel 711L, and then moved toward the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved from the middle reel 711M. The display area of each symbol row may be reduced by moving the symbol reel toward the rear reel and then moving it toward the middle reel 711M.

In the tenth embodiment, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved toward the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved rearward, the LEDs provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side. The brightness of the light emitting means such as LED may be higher than the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R located on the front side of the middle reel 711M. The brightness of the light emitting means provided inside each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is controlled by the sub control board 940.

According to this modified example, the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the rear reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R, whereby the middle reel 711M. Is located on the rear side of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, it is possible to prevent the symbol on the middle reel 711M from being difficult to see.

(10) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eleventh Embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B arranged on the front side of the reel device 710 has been illustrated. When a light guide plate having a similar curved portion is arranged in front of a movable body such as a character performing a predetermined motion, the present invention may be applied to a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate.

In the eleventh embodiment, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is configured to be curved in a substantially cylindrical shape along the curved surface of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R of the reel device 710, and has a substantially arc shape in a side view. Although the curved structure has been described, it is not necessarily required to have an arc shape in a side view, and it may have another shape projecting to the front side such as including a curved line or a broken line.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812 are inserted into the projection 892 that is provided on the rear side of the base body 701 so as to project rearward. A configuration may be employed in which a front projection of the unit 812 (that is, the front of the reflector 823) is provided so as to project forward, and a mounting hole corresponding to the projection is provided in the base 701. In this case, like the through hole 841A, the mounting hole provided in the base body 701 is formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the up-down direction than the outer diameter of the protruding portion corresponding to the mounting hole. In, the same effect as in the case where the through hole 841A and the like are formed in a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the protruding portion 892 is obtained. Similarly, the light source unit 813 may be provided with a projecting portion projecting forward from the front side, and a mounting hole corresponding to the projecting portion may be provided in the base 701.

In the eleventh embodiment, after fixing (attaching) the light source units 812 and 813 above and below the light guide plate 715B, the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the outer cover 715A via the light source units 812 and 813. It is configured to be fixed to. Instead of this, upper and lower light source units corresponding to the light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A, and then the light guide plate 715B may be fixed to the light source unit.

In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 is configured to have a substantially arcuate front end shape in a side view along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. The curved shape of the light guide plate 715B does not have to follow the curved shape of the outer cover 715A1, and one or a plurality of protruding portions has a shape protruding toward the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the part to be corrected is partially corrected. In this case, it is preferable to provide at least a central pressing portion that presses the rear side of the most projecting portion at a height position at the substantially center in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In a situation where the radius of curvature is larger than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is insufficient, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected. In addition, it is preferable to provide at least a vertical pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion located at the rear side of the curved portion 715B1 at the height position of the upper and lower end sides in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. Accordingly, in a situation where the radius of curvature is smaller than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is excessive, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected.

(11) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twelfth Embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, the trapezoidal recess Z having the sides Z1 to Z3 in front view is provided on the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B. Although the configuration is adopted, the shape of the recesses provided in the end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 does not necessarily have to be trapezoidal. For example, it may be a recess formed by two continuous sides in a mountain shape or a recess including four or more sides.

In the twelfth embodiment, the recess Z provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B has the corners formed by the intersection of two continuous sides. The corners may be rounded or chamfered as long as a region that does not enter or a region into which light weaker than the light traveling in the directions of the arrows F1 to F3 enters is formed.

In the twelfth embodiment, the trapezoidal recess Z is provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B so that light does not enter, as in the areas D1 and D2, or the arrow F1 to Although the light guide including a predetermined direction in which light weaker than the light traveling in the F3 direction enters is configured, the recess Z has an arc shape, and light does not partially enter due to black coating or plating. By doing so, the predetermined direction may be configured. Alternatively, a dedicated component that can configure the predetermined direction may be provided between the end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and the light emitting means 834 or between the end surface 715B5 and the light emitting means 824.

In the twelfth embodiment, the concave Z is provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4, 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 to give the light guide plate 715B randomness, but the curved portion is formed. Even when a concave portion similar to the concave portion Z is provided on the end face of the flat light guide plate that does not have the light guide plate, the light guide plate can have randomness in how the light is emitted.

(12) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which once a big hit occurs, the expected big hit value is increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine which is in a special game state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Alternatively, it may be implemented in an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various kinds of game machines such as arrangement ball type pachinko machines and sparrow balls may be implemented. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing problems and effects as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets, etc. The meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Characteristic 10>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of rows of symbols in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of decorative symbols) of variable display of symbols in the plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is met, the display unit variably displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops with a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols showing the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is obtained. With game control means (main control board 920) to be generated,
Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means is suspended are given storage units (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit Reserved storage means (main control board 920) that can be stored in
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the change mode selection unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. As compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results, the variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit is likely to increase is selected. A gaming machine characterized by.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the variation execution means displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the selected variation mode. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols showing the first result. To do.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the reserved storage means up to the predetermined number. It When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection unit determines whether the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included in the lottery results. As compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included, the variation mode is selected so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit is likely to increase.

Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit tends to increase. Therefore, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying the special effect is increased. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, since the feeling of the progress of the game can be improved, the interest in the game can be improved.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in Feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in Feature 10 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the characteristic 10, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means is replaced with the description of “lottery result” and also as “information used for lottery by lottery means”. Alternatively, it may be “information corresponding to the lottery result”.

<Characteristic 11>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of rows of symbols in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of decorative symbols) of variable display of symbols in the plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is met, the display unit variably displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops with a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols showing the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is obtained. With game control means (main control board 920) to be generated,
Among the lottery results by the lottery means, a holding storage means capable of storing a lottery result in which execution of variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means is held in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit ( Sub-control board 940),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
The variation mode selectable by the variation mode selection means is such that after the symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where they form a part of the symbol combination showing the first result, the remaining symbols for which the variable display is continued are drawn by the lottery. Including at least a reach display mode in which a stop display is performed with a symbol according to the lottery result by the means, and a non-reach display mode not including the reach display mode,
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the change mode selection unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. A gaming machine which selects a non-reach display mode with a high probability compared with a case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the variation execution means displays the symbols in the plurality of columns in the selected variation mode. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols showing the first result. To do.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the reserved storage means up to the predetermined number. It When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection unit determines whether the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included in the lottery results. The non-reach display mode is selected with high probability as compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is likely to be displayed.

When the variation display of the reach display mode is displayed, the player may stop the firing of the game ball during the variation display in consideration of the fact that a special game state will occur thereafter. On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in Feature 11, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is displayed. Since it is easily displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the firing of the game ball during the variable display.

As a result, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit is likely to increase, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying the special effect is increased. Increase. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. In comparison, since the variable display in the non-reach display mode is easily displayed, it is possible to more easily display the special effect when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result. it can. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect, so that the progress of the game can be refreshed and the interest in the game can be improved.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in Feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in Feature 11 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the suspending storage means may be replaced with the description of “lottery result” as “information used for lottery by the lottery means”. Alternatively, it may be “information corresponding to the lottery result”.

<Characteristic 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 11,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time relating to variation display of symbols in a plurality of rows when the starting condition is satisfied,
The variation mode selecting means is for selecting the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determining means,
The variation mode selection means, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. In the case where the lottery result indicating that the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the pending storage means, Compared to the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in, there is a high probability that selection
The variation execution means corresponds to the reach display mode determined by the variation time determination means, and displays the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. When the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination unit is selected by the fluctuation mode selection unit when the lottery result shown is included, the selected non-reach A gaming machine characterized in that a variation display of the variation time determined by the variation time determining means is performed by performing the display mode one or more times.

With the gaming machine according to Feature 12, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result is displayed in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. When the lottery result shown is included, the variation mode selection means, the non-reach display mode of the variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, of the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the pending storage means. The selection is performed with high probability as compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included therein.

When the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode and the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode When the non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is selected by the selection means, the selected non-reach display mode is performed by the fluctuation execution means one or more times. Then, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means is performed.

Therefore, in order to perform the variable display of the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the reach display mode, the data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time shorter than the reach display mode can be diverted, and the reach display mode is supported. It is not necessary to specially prepare the data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time. Thereby, the consumption amount of the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be appropriately suppressed.

<Characteristic 20>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. Each operation mode is performed for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or a plurality of operation times set within the production executable period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative pattern). Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting each special effect to be executed in the case of being broken, from a plurality of types of effects,
Of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the effect executable period, the first operation mode is First special effect display means (sub-control board 940) that displays the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the first operation mode on the display section when the operation unit is operated,
Each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the effect executable period. Storage control means (sub-control board 940) for storing the effect information to be stored in a predetermined storage section (RAM of the sub-control board 940) so that the respective special effects can be restored.
When the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode of the plurality of operation modes within the predetermined restoration possible period set after the end of the effect executable period, the storage control unit stores the operation unit in the storage unit. Second special effect display means (sub-control board 940) that displays the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode on the display unit based on the stored effect information; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, a game machine in which a player operates a staging button at a predetermined timing to change a display content on a display device or output a corresponding sound from a speaker, etc. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2016-193329).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the operation of the effect button by the player at the predetermined timing. For example, if the player operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the player can experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button, but if the player does not operate the effect button at that timing, The player cannot experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on the fact that the player operates the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means displays the variation of the symbols on the display unit, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

It is possible to perform an effect composed of at least a part of the period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result is obtained by the lottery means until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is made by the variation executing means. The operation time is set within the period. With respect to each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit operable at the operation time, each special effect executed when each operation mode is performed is a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selection unit. To be selected from. The effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit is stored in a predetermined storage unit by the storage control unit so that each special effect can be restored.

When the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the production executable period. With the first special effect display means, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the first operation mode is displayed on the display unit.

On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode of the plurality of operation modes within the predetermined restoration possible period set after the end of the effect executable period, the storage control unit stores Based on the effect information stored in the section, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode is displayed on the display section.

Therefore, even if the operation unit is not operated in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time within the production executable period, by operating the operation unit in the second operation mode during the restoration possible period. , A special effect that the player could not see because he did not operate the operation section in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time in the effect executable period (a special operation corresponding to the second operation mode). You can restore the production and see it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a negative emotion in the game, such as regret not having seen some or all of the special effects in his/her will during the production executable period. The decline in interest is suppressed.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the “first special effect display device” and the “second special effect display device” in the feature 20 respectively execute the “first special effect execution device” and the “second special effect execution device” that execute various special effects including display. It may be an “effect producing means”.

<Characteristic 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20,
The production executable period includes an execution period of variable display of symbols executed by the change executing means,
A plurality of the operation times are set within the execution period of the variable display of the symbols,
The second special effect display means, during the restorable period, the second special effect display means, at a second operation time after the operation time at which the operation section is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes. When the operation section is operated in this operation mode, based on the effect information stored in the storage section by the storage control means, the special effect selection means selected for the second operation mode by the special effect selection means. A gaming machine characterized by displaying effects on the display unit.

If the gaming machine described in the feature 21, in the structure in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation times within the execution period of the variable display of the symbols, the variable display of the symbols The special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation unit in the first operation mode at the previous operation time in the execution period, but the special operation corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed at the subsequent operation time in the second operation mode. Even when the operation unit is not operated and the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the operation unit in the second operation mode within the restorable period. , The special effect corresponding to the second operation mode can be restored and viewed.

If multiple operation times are provided within the execution period of variable display of symbols, if the special effect that can be displayed for each operation time is an effect that suggests the probability of occurrence of a special game state after that, later If the displayed special effect is an effect that suggests that it is less likely to transition to the special game state than the previously displayed special effect, the player loses the expectation of transitioning to the special game state. There is a risk that the game will be disappointing. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player may choose not to operate the operation part at a later operation time, but if the operation part is not operated at a later operation time, then transition to a special game state. In some cases, such as when doing, you might want to know later what happened if you were to display a special effect that you did not want to display.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the player can restore and see the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode during the restorable period, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 22>
A gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
The second special effect display means performs the operation in the second operation mode at the operation time when the operation section is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes during the restorable period. When the unit is operated, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 22, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at the common operation time within the effect executable period, the first operation can be performed in the effect executable period. Even if the operation unit cannot be operated in the second operation mode by operating the operation unit in the operation mode No., the player corresponds to the second operation mode in the restorable period. You can see the special effects restored. As a result, the special game that the player could not see in the production executable period can be seen, so that the player can be satisfied and the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

<Characteristic 30>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
A first operation section (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
A second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by the player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition for which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. Select a special effect to be executed when the first operation section is operated at the operation time set within the effect executable period (variable display execution period of decorative symbols) from a plurality of types of effects Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940),
When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. Is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit, and when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect selection unit selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A special effect control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the displayed special effect to be displayed at a position different from the predetermined position, and a gaming machine.

In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, a game machine in which a player operates a staging button at a predetermined timing to change a display content on a display device or output a corresponding sound from a speaker, etc. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2016-193329).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the operation of the effect button by the player at the predetermined timing. For example, since the effect displayed on the display device by the player operating the operation button is always displayed in the same area, in that respect, there is no novelty and it is monotonous.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the characteristic 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on the player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means displays the variation of the symbols on the display unit, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

It is possible to perform an effect composed of at least a part of the period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result is obtained by the lottery means until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is made by the variation executing means. The operation time is set within the period. Each special effect executed when the operation unit is operated at the operation time is selected from the plurality of types of effects by the special effect selecting means.

When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the production executable period, the special effect control unit selects the special operation selection unit for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect control unit causes the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. It is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

Therefore, the display position of the special effect can be changed by operating the first operation unit or the second operation unit, so that the game for displaying the special effect in accordance with the operation of the player has variety. It becomes possible to improve the interest.

<Characteristic 31>
A game machine according to feature 30,
The special effect control means, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selection with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A gaming machine characterized by transmitting effect information indicating a special effect selected by means to another gaming machine and displaying the special effect on a display unit of the other gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 31, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. By transmitting the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means to the other game machine to the operation, the special effect is displayed on the display unit of the other game machine.

Therefore, since the special effect can be displayed on the display unit of another gaming machine, the special effect can be viewed together with the other player, and an interest different from the case of playing the game alone can be obtained.

<Characteristic 32>
A game machine according to feature 30,
When the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means performs the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect selected by the selection means is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position on the display unit, and the first operation unit or the second operation unit is displayed at the predetermined position at the operation time. A game machine characterized by displaying the contents displayed on the display unit when not operated.

With the gaming machine described in Feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. A position where the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the operation is different from a predetermined position on the display unit (that is, a position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the time of the operation). Is displayed in. On the other hand, at a predetermined position on the display unit, the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated at the operation time is displayed.

Therefore, the player simultaneously displays the special effect displayed by operating the second operation unit and the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated. Since it can be seen, the interest in the game can be appropriately improved.

<Characteristic 33>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
A receiver (sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from another gaming machine is provided.
The special effect control means, when the effect information transmitted from another game machine is received by the receiving means, displays the special effect indicated by the effect information on the display unit.

In the case of the gaming machine described in Feature 33, when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received, the special effect display means displays the special effect indicated by the effect information based on the received effect information. Is displayed in the section. Therefore, the special effect based on the effect information received from the other gaming machine can be displayed on the display unit, so that the special effect can be viewed together with the other player who is playing on the other gaming machine, and the player can play the game alone. You can get a different interest from doing it.

<Characteristic 40>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, a holding storage means capable of storing the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the change executing means is held in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number of upper limits. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the special effect display unit stores the lottery result in the storage unit by the holding storage unit. A gaming machine, wherein the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the characteristic 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means displays the variation of the symbols on the display unit, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the suspending storage means up to the predetermined number. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

When the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes a lottery result indicating the first result, the special effect display unit displays the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, since the feeling of progress of the game can be improved, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the gaming machine in which the lottery result can be stored in the storage unit up to the predetermined number (upper limit) by the holding storage unit.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 40 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in Feature 40, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be replaced with the description of the “lottery result” as “information used for lottery by the lottery means”. Alternatively, it may be “information corresponding to the lottery result”.

<Characteristic 50>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
Among the lottery results, a holding storage means capable of storing the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the change executing means is held in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number of upper limits. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit. And
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit in a predetermined first time period, then performs a predetermined second time within a predetermined period including the first time period. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit again at the time, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed at the first time. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means displays the variation of the symbols on the display unit, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in the predetermined storage unit by the reserved storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit has reached the upper limit, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can enter the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time period, holds it in the predetermined second time period within the predetermined time period including the first time period. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first period.

Therefore, within the predetermined period, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, a special effect is displayed compared to when the number of lottery results reaches the upper limit before that. Since it becomes easier, the player can face a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store the lottery result up to a predetermined number (upper limit) in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 50 may be "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be “information used for lottery by the lottery means” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, it may be “information corresponding to the lottery result”.

<Characteristic 51>
In the gaming machine described in feature 50,
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage section by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit in a predetermined first time period, and then in the storage section by the holding storage means in the second time period. When the number of stored lottery results reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the holding A gaming machine, which displays the special effect with a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 51, the special effect display means stores the hold result in the second time after the number of lottery results stored in the storage section by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the means reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit, Since the special effect is easily displayed in comparison, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, since the feeling of the progress of the game can be improved, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic 60>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying a design,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbols, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920),
A predetermined period set within a period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result is obtained by the lottery means until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation execution means. As a first special effect that can be displayed at the first time, a first special effect selecting unit (sub-control board) that selects one special effect from a plurality of types of special effects that suggest the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. 940),
A first special effect means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the first special effect selected by the first special effect selecting means on the display unit at the first time period;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, and before the predetermined second time set after the first time in the period comes, the operation unit Is operated, and if the probability of occurrence of the special game state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect suggesting the probability of occurrence of the special game state is set to the second special effect. Second special effect control means for controlling such that the second special effect that is not displayed on the display unit at a time or that indicates a higher probability of occurrence of the special game state than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit (Sub-control board 940), and provided with a gaming machine.

In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, various character designs and the like are displayed during variable display of the designs, and every time the character designs and the like are displayed, the expectation of a big hit according to the type of the displayed character design, etc. What is suggested to a person is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153699).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional game machine configured so that the effect that suggests the expectation to the big hit to the player is displayed during the variable display of the symbols. For example, in the variable display of the symbols, when the display of the character symbols and the like displayed later has a lower expectation for the jackpot suggested by the display than the display of the character symbols and the like displayed earlier, the player is The expectation for the jackpot is temporarily increased by the previous display, but is lost by the subsequent display, which may reduce the interest in the game.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to appropriately execute a predetermined effect based on the player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means performs variable display of the symbols on the display unit, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

At a predetermined first time set within a period from when the starting condition for obtaining the first result by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. The displayable first special effect is selected by the first special effect selection means from a plurality of types of special effects that indicate the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display unit at the first time by the first special effect means.

After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, the variation execution means changes the first result from the period (the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied). When the operation unit is operated before the predetermined second time set after the first time within the period until the stop display of the stop symbol shown is performed), the first special effect is suggested. When the probability of occurrence of the special game state is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state is not displayed on the display unit at the second time by the control of the second special effect control means. Or, a second special effect that indicates a higher probability of occurrence of a special game state than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit.

Therefore, after the first special effect, it is possible to suppress the display of the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special game state lower than that of the first special effect, so that the second special effect is displayed after the first special effect. In the configuration that is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state and diminishing the interest in the game.

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but may be used in place of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. , Sound effects, light effects, motion effects of operable structures, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "first special effect display means" in the feature 60 may be "first special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display, and the "second special effect control means" may be It may be controlled to execute various special effects including display.

<Characteristic 70>
A predetermined symbol row is a rotating body (middle reel 711M) arranged so that a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of variable displays are attached , Each of a plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body (left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, right reel 711R) by varying each of the plurality of rotating bodies A display unit (reel device 710) capable of displaying,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is being performed by the variation executing means, information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. A storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by storing the information in the RAM 920).
Based on the performance target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two variable displays are executed, the predetermined effect is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means. And a performance executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing
In the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, the predetermined effect is the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined spinning body among the plurality of symbol rows, The game machine characterized in that it is an effect in which the player stops visually so that it can be visually recognized with a symbol having numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display executed before the variable display of.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, triggered by the game ball winning the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is conducted, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol changes (see, for example, JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the timing of winning, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, it is required to diversify the prefetching effect.

Further, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of holding and storing the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value. This problem is also common to the gaming machines described in the following features 80 to B0.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. Further, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize a configuration capable of holding and storing a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, the display unit has a three-dimensional revolving body arranged so as to circulate a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols with two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of variable displays as a predetermined symbol row, Each of a plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body is configured to be variably displayable by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation execution means causes the display section to variably display the plurality of symbol rows, and then the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit, thereby storing the information. With a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, As the predetermined effect, in the fluctuation display executed before the predetermined fluctuation display by the fluctuation executing means, the symbols of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined body of the plurality of symbol rows are subjected to the predetermined fluctuation display. The effect of stopping the game so that the player can visually recognize the symbol with the numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display that is executed until that time is executed.

Therefore, the player visually recognizes the numerical information attached to the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined spinning body in the variable display being executed, and then executes the variable display until the predetermined variable display is executed. The number of times the variable display is performed can be grasped from the numerical information. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, the expectation of the lottery result for the gradually changing predetermined display can be amplified, and thereby the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display executed until the predetermined variable display is executed is performed by the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the rotating body for the variable display, so that the player may not miss the countdown. Can be suppressed.

Further, the variable display of the symbol string is not limited to the rotating body, but there is also a gaming machine that executes the image display by a liquid crystal display device or the like, but when the variable display is executed by the image display, the development cost becomes high, There are many players who tend to increase the cost of parts and also prefer variable display by a three-dimensional rotating body. At this time, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, if the number of countdowns described above is to be displayed in addition to the variable display symbols, the cost of the display device is added.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the three-dimensional rotating body is configured to include a symbol to which numerical information is attached, and a part of the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means by this symbol Can be configured. Therefore, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the display size of the symbol displayed on the rotating body is set large to make it easy for the player to see the symbol, and to suppress cost increase. In the meanwhile, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with an effect in which the countdown is displayed by the design until the predetermined variable display is executed.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 70, “...stop visibly for the player with the symbol with the numerical information” is not limited to complete stop of the symbol with the numerical information. The symbol may be stopped within a predetermined range and accompanied by an action such as swinging, and may be a temporary stop during a change, not a final stop of the symbol.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine described in feature 70,
The predetermined effect is a change display executed before the predetermined change display by the change executing means, and the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined turn body are different from the predetermined turn body. In the state where the body is fluctuating, it is an effect that the player visually stops with a pattern with numerical information corresponding to the number of fluctuation displays executed until the predetermined fluctuation display is executed. A gaming machine characterized by.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the player changes the running display to the predetermined spinning body while another spinning body (a spinning body different from the predetermined spinning body) is changing. By visually observing the numerical information attached to the symbols in the displayed symbol string, the number of variable displays executed until a predetermined variable display is executed thereafter can be grasped from the numerical information. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the predetermined rotating body from the plurality of rotating bodies by distinguishing it from the other rotating bodies, and thus can prevent the player from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined rotating body.

<Characteristic 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying a symbol,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the symbols, and then the first variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the first variation execution means, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a game state,
When the starting condition is satisfied while the variable display of the symbols is being displayed by the first variation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit. By storing the information in (RAM of the main control board 920), the holding means (main control board 920) for holding the information until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information is executed by the first fluctuation executing means. When,
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery results held by the holding means reaches an upper limit,
In the case where the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means has reached an upper limit and execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the display unit or the display unit Second variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that performs a predetermined second variation display on the second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from
Special effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second change executing means. And a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that the information, which corresponds to the lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in Feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the symbols are variably displayed on the display unit by the first variation execution means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stopped symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result.

When the start condition is satisfied while the variable display is being performed by the first variation executing means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result obtained by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit. The information can be held up to a predetermined number until the fluctuation display means executes the fluctuation display corresponding to the information.

When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the second variation execution means performs a predetermined second variation display on the display unit or a second display unit different from the display unit, and then stops in a predetermined stop mode. After that, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing unit, so that the player increases the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result. With the purpose, it is possible to face the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store and hold the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

In addition, since the player is informed as to whether or not the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means as a stop display after the second variation display, the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery result reaches the upper limit. Therefore, the player's expectation for the execution of the special effect can be appropriately amplified during the period from the end of the second variable display (that is, during the execution period of the second variable display).

The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by the operation of an operable structure, or It may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

Further, the second variation executing means in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 is a display section or a second different from the display section when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit. After performing the predetermined second variation display on the display unit, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, stop display is performed in a predetermined stop mode, and execution of the special effect is not selected. Alternatively, the stop display may be displayed in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode.

<Characteristic 81>
A gaming machine according to feature 80,
The second variation execution means performs the second variation display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, and then the special effect selection unit selects execution of the special effect. A gaming machine, which performs stop display at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether the special effect is executed or not.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 81, when the second variation display is performed by the second variation execution means, when the special effect selection means selects the special effect execution, and when the special effect execution is selected. Since the position of the stop display after the second variation display is different from that in the case where the second display is not performed, the player can easily intuitively determine from the position of the stop display whether or not the execution of the special effect is selected. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

<Characteristic 90>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of symbol strings in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then a variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that stops and displays the symbol combination according to the lottery result.
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a certain special game state,
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery results held by the holding means reaches an upper limit,
Special effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means,
When the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit and the variable display is being executed by the fluctuation executing unit, a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display. And a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for recognizing that the execution of the special effect has been selected at a time different from the time when the game is played. Machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and in the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and in the lottery result as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game ball enters the starting port while the variable display of the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the hit information used for the big hit lottery (corresponding to the lottery result) There is information configured such that information, which is equivalent to a lottery result, is reserved and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit (for example, see JP-A-2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having the conventional structure capable of storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball enters the starting opening, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit, thereby storing the information. With a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When execution of the special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing unit, so that the player increases the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result. With the purpose, it is possible to face the game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store and hold the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

Further, when the special effect selecting means selects the execution of the special effect, and when the fluctuation executing means executes the variable display, the execution result of the special effect is selected. As a result, the variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize it at a time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed.

Therefore, the display indicating that the special effect has been selected does not overlap with the display time of the notice display, and the player is unlikely to miss the display indicating that the special effect has been selected. Further, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display, the player can concentrate on the attention display, so that the expectation for the variable display being executed by the attention display is suitably improved. be able to.

Note that the "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 is a stop display in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol rows form part of a combination of symbols corresponding to the first result. It may be a display until so-called (so-called "reach display"), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestive effect by light emission of the light emitting unit (for ease of transition to a special game state). It may be a performance that suggests the degree or the degree of expectation).

Further, the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, a sound effect, a light effect, or an operation of an operable structure, or It may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

<Characteristic 91>
A gaming machine described in feature 90,
In the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means, the selection result display means is A gaming machine characterized by accelerating the end time of the notice display and displaying the fact that the execution of the special effect has been selected so that the player can recognize after the end of the notice display.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 91, in the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means, By the selection result display means, the end time of the notice display is advanced, and the fact that the execution of the special effect is selected is displayed so that the player can recognize after the end of the notice display. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the attention display is displayed and the display that the execution of the special effect has been selected can be shown early.

<Characteristic 92>
A gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The predetermined attention display is stopped and displayed in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol columns form a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol columns are displayed. It is a display until a stop display with a symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
In the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means, the selection result display means is After the predetermined attention display is finished, a game machine is displayed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 92, in the case where the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the change display executed by the change executing means. The selection result display means displays that the selection of execution of the special effect is recognizable to the player after the end of the attention display. Here, the attention display is stopped and displayed in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol columns form a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol columns are selected by lottery means. It is a display until it is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the lottery result, and it is a display that expects the player to transition to the special game state, so by devoting the player to the attention display, execution by the attention display It is possible to preferably improve the expectation for the variable display inside.

<Feature A0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of symbol strings in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. And when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, it is more advantageous than the normal game state after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state,
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Based on the performance target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect And a performance executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is
In the predetermined display area (middle line L2) that will transition to the special game state when the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of symbol columns are different from the first result. Execute a first variable display that is a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result and is stop-displayed with a stop symbol that is a combination of predetermined symbols that does not transition to the special game state,
After executing the first variation display, one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation executing means, or included in the predetermined symbol combination in the predetermined variation display. Part of the symbols that are included and part of the symbols that cannot be stopped and displayed corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the symbols are included (second sub symbol 713B) While maintaining the state of being displayed in a predetermined display area, another symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row) different from the symbol row (middle symbol row) including the part of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows ) Starts the second variation display that changes,
In synchronization with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variation display, or at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variation display, a symbol that has been stopped from the previous time in the plurality of symbol rows A gaming machine characterized by an effect of starting a variation of a row (middle pattern row).

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, triggered by the game ball winning the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is conducted, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol changes (see, for example, JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the timing of winning, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, it is required to diversify the prefetching effect.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit, thereby storing the information. With a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect is rendered. It is executed by the execution means.

Specifically, in the predetermined effect, first, a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a predetermined display area that will transition to the special game state when the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed. The first variation display is performed in which the stop symbols corresponding to the lottery result different from the one result and the stop symbols that are a combination of predetermined symbols that do not transition to the special game state are stopped and displayed.

After the first variable display is executed, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display by the change executing means, or in the predetermined variable display, the stop displayed in the first variable display is stopped. Part of the symbols included in the predetermined symbol combination which is the symbol, and when the symbol of the part is included, the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area. While maintaining the state of being displayed in the predetermined display area, the second variable display is started in which other symbol columns different from the symbol column including the part of the symbols vary among the plurality of symbol columns.

Then, in synchronization with a predetermined attention display performed in a predetermined variable display, or at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variable display, a symbol that has been stopped from before the previous time in a plurality of symbol rows The variation of the column (that is, the symbol column including a part of the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) is started.

Therefore, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, or, in the predetermined variable display, as a second variable display, some of the stop symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display While the state in which the symbols are displayed in the predetermined display area is maintained, the variation of the other symbol sequence different from the symbol sequence including the part of the symbols is performed, so that the player starts the second variation display. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the display (stop display) of the lottery result for the predetermined variable display, which is to be received thereafter, can be amplified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, the symbol sequence that has been stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display is synchronized with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variable display, or a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined variable display. Since the fluctuation is started at the previous timing, it is strongly impressed that the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display is approaching, and thereby the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined fluctuation display can be further enhanced.

Further, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol column that has been stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display (part of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) are: If the symbol is included, the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area, so in the one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, the second variable display It is possible to prevent the stop symbol corresponding to the first result from being stopped and displayed when another symbol column that fluctuates as is stopped.

The "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature A0 is a stop display in a state in which a part of the plurality of symbol columns constitutes a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the first result. It may be a display until so-called (so-called "reach display"), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestive effect by light emission of the light emitting unit (e.g. It may be a performance that suggests the degree or the degree of expectation).

<Feature A1>
A gaming machine according to feature A0,
The first variable display is a state where the other symbol sequence is changing, and a symbol that cannot constitute the first result in a symbol sequence different from the other symbol sequence is stopped in the predetermined display area. After that, the game machine characterized in that the other symbol row is stopped so as to be a stop symbol which is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

If the gaming machine described in the feature A1, in the first variable display, the symbol row stopped prior to the other symbol rows is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the subsequent predetermined variable display, or Since it is stopped until it is changed again at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the most fluctuated symbol sequence, and the predetermined fluctuation display by the maximum fluctuation is It is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the lottery result.

<Feature B0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying a plurality of symbol strings in a variable manner,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol arrays, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) performs the stop display with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop display corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means is stopped and displayed, a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state And a game control means (main control board 920) for generating
When the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.
Based on the performance target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect And a performance executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is a part of the symbols (second sub-symbol 713B) that does not constitute a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, as a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation executing means. , When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, it continues to be displayed in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) to be changed to the special game state during the entire period of the variable display, After the variable display of a symbol sequence (left symbol sequence, right symbol sequence) different from the symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence) including the above-mentioned part of the symbol sequence, the effect of stopping and displaying the other symbol sequence A gaming machine characterized by being.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, triggered by the game ball winning the starting winning opening, the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is conducted, and the jackpot is awarded based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When it is determined to generate, a configuration is known in which a big hit is generated after the effect design is stopped and displayed with a big hit design (for example, "777").

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the big hit lottery and performs the pre-reading effect while the effect symbol changes (see, for example, JP-A-2009-291480). With pre-reading production, when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening while the production design is changing, the number of reserved balls is added and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the timing of winning, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives advance notice of the game state that occurs when the variable display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the holding ball is completed. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first holding ball is a big hit, it is announced that a big hit will occur when the next variable display of the current variable display ends.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game machine having the conventional configuration that performs the prefetching effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in the prefetching effect, it is required to diversify the prefetching effect.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation executing means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit, thereby storing the information. With a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold the change display means until the change display corresponding to the information is executed.

Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed, which is the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined effect is rendered. It is executed by the execution means. By executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined variable display that comes after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the predetermined effect, in the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, some symbols that do not form the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are the stop symbols corresponding to the first result. Is displayed in a predetermined display area that will transition to the special game state when stopped and displayed, and continues to be displayed for the entire period of the variable display, and the symbol row that includes the part of the symbols among the plural symbol rows After the different symbol sequence is variably displayed, the different symbol sequence is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, in the variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, by showing that some symbols that do not form the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are displayed from the start to the end of the variable display, the game The person recognizes that the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is not displayed in the variable display, and thus, the expectation for the subsequent predetermined variable display can be further amplified.

In the gaming machine described in the feature B0, "a symbol that does not form a stop symbol corresponding to the first result" displayed in a predetermined display area during the entire period of the variable display is one symbol of a plurality of symbol strings. It may be a symbol included in the column, or may be a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of the symbol column except for one symbol column among the plurality of symbol columns.

<Characteristic C0>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball shot from a launching device (launching device 330) flows down,
A ball guide nail portion (nails 411A, nails 411B) made up of a plurality of game nails standing upright side by side so that the game balls can be guided in a predetermined direction in the game area,
A plate-like light-transmissive nail support member (area J of the base 401) that supports the base end sides of the plurality of game nails forming the ball guide nail portion and has a light-transmitting property so that the front side to the rear side can be seen. When,
A first passage (left side first passage 1613A, right side first passage 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member;
A passage forming portion (guide passage 1612) that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) among the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage,
A detection unit (left-side starting prize switch 1441A, right-side starting prize switch 1441B) capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage,
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when the game ball is detected by the detection unit,
It is a second passage provided in a direction different from the first passage on the upstream side of the detection unit, and when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit. A second passage (left-side second passage 1614A, right-side second passage 1614B) that is not operated;
An information display unit that displays predetermined privilege non-grant information (non-start prize area information) that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area to which the predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters. And an information display portion 753),
In the case where the information display unit is behind the light-transmissive nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of game nails when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine is provided at a position overlapping the inner sides of the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction in.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball that enters a winning opening (for example, a starting opening) provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch), a bonus is given to the game ( For example, when a start winning occurs and a big hit lottery is conducted, and when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery, a special game state is entered, and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening). (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, with respect to a guide passage that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance to the starting opening, it may be detected by a detection sensor that branches from the guide passage and detects a prize at the starting opening. By providing an unbranched passage, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part of it may not be a starting prize.

However, as represented by the above-mentioned gaming machine, when another passage is provided so that a part of the game ball that has entered the guide passage from the predetermined entrance does not become a prize for giving a predetermined privilege, the other There may be room for improvement in the configuration that allows the player to appropriately recognize the existence of the passage.

For example, if predetermined information is displayed so that the player can recognize the existence of an area where a game ball that has entered through a predetermined entrance can enter and that does not become a starting prize such as the above-mentioned branch passage, the information indicates that the starting prize is present. While it is possible to inform the player of the existence of the area that does not become a player, there is a possibility that the player may feel the game uninteresting when the game ball enters the area where the start winning is not achieved.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C0, a part of the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance leading to the detection unit to which the predetermined privilege is given when the game ball is detected has the predetermined privilege. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a configuration in which another passage is provided so as not to be a prize to be awarded, and can appropriately display the presence of the other passage. That is, the game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance among the game balls flowing down the game area is guided to the first passage by the passage forming unit. When the detecting unit detects a game ball flowing down along the first passage, the privilege granting unit grants a predetermined privilege.

On the other hand, a second passage that branches in a direction different from the first passage is provided on the upstream side of the detection unit, and some of the game balls flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When the game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by the detection unit, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but from the first passage to the second passage. When entering, the player cannot obtain a predetermined privilege.

The first passage is provided on the back side of the plate-shaped light-transmitting nail support member having a light-transmitting property that allows the front side to the rear side to be seen through. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first passage. It is possible to visually recognize the entry of the game ball from the first passage to the second passage.

An information display unit is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. On the information display portion, predetermined privilege non-grant information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters is displayed. Therefore, the player visually recognizing the predetermined privilege non-granting information recognizes that the second passage is a region where the predetermined privilege is not given when the game ball enters.

The information display unit is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails in a predetermined diagonal view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine, so that the viewpoint can be changed during the game. A player located on the front side of the gaming machine will see the information display section that overlaps the back side of the plurality of game nails when looking at a predetermined diagonal direction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player during the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-granting information by the plurality of game nails, and even when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. The player's discouragement that the predetermined privilege is not granted can be appropriately suppressed.

On the other hand, the light-transmissive nail support member is configured as a member that supports the base end sides of the plurality of game nails that form the ball guide nail portion, but the information display unit is configured to display the plurality of games when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is provided so that it does not overlap the nails. Therefore, the visibility of the information display section from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, and the predetermined privilege non-granting information can be appropriately reported.

In addition, examples of the "predetermined privilege" described in the characteristic C0 include occurrence of a start winning, lottery conditions, lottery probability, special game state generated when a lottery is won, and number of game balls paid out.

Further, the "position overlapping the back side of the plurality of gaming nails in the predetermined diagonal view" described in the characteristic C0 overlaps the tip end side in the diagonal direction with respect to the plurality of gaming nails in the predetermined diagonal view. It may be the position.

<Characteristic C1>
A gaming machine described in feature C0,
A first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) that is disposed on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member and that overlaps with the front side of the information display portion in a front view of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

In the gaming machine described in the feature C1, the first rear side portion having a portion that overlaps with the front side of the information display unit in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the predetermined privilege-less information that overlaps the rear side of the first rear side when viewed from the front. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player during the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-grant information, so that the player is discouraged when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can be suppressed more suitably.

<Characteristic C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A portion (passage wall) that is disposed behind the light-transmissive nail support member and that overlaps with the front side of the information display section in the predetermined diagonal view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A game machine having a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion 1631B).

In the gaming machine described in the feature C2, the rear side of the light-transmissive nail support member is on the front side of the information display section in a predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the second rear side portion having the overlapping portion is provided, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-granting information overlapping the rear side of the second rear side portion when viewed from the front. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player during the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-grant information, so that the player is discouraged when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can be suppressed more suitably.

<Characteristic C3>
The gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not given,
The predetermined character string is arranged along the arrangement of the plurality of game nails that overlap the front side of the information display section in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

In the gaming machine described in the feature C3, the predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string, and the predetermined character string has a predetermined diagonal when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the game machine. The game nails are arranged along the arrangement of a plurality of game nails that overlap with the front side of the information display unit in the direction view. Therefore, since many areas of the character string forming the predetermined privilege non-grant information are arranged so as to overlap the plurality of game nails in the predetermined diagonal direction, the player in the game can obtain the predetermined privilege non-grant information. Is harder to recognize. Therefore, the player's discouragement when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage can be suppressed more suitably.

<Feature D0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A decorative surface (base 701) that is provided on the rear side of the game board and is located in the opening when the game machine is viewed from the front;
A three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate is regarded as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging the plurality of the rotating barrels is variably displayed by rotating each rotating body. A variable display unit configured to be capable of being provided in the opening in the game board, and a variable display in which a part of the plurality of turning bodies projects forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized. Part (reel device 710),
The plurality of symbols are provided so as to be visible on the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the cross section as viewed from a predetermined direction crossing the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine projects in a substantially arc shape to the front side. A display cover portion configured in a plate shape, and when the light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate surface is continuous, a predetermined image is generated by the light. A display cover portion (resin cover 715) having a light guide portion (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying (pattern 743);
A game board image display unit that is provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, at least in part of the periphery of the opening in the game plate, and is predetermined together with the predetermined image. And a game board image display section (pattern 741) forming a part of a decorative image (a group of fish facing left) continuous on the direction side of,
The decoration surface is provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section of the display cover section in a front view of the gaming machine, and the decoration is continuous with the predetermined image and the game board image display section. A game machine provided with a decorative surface image display section (pattern 742) forming a part of an image.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

In such a conventional pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device displays symbols corresponding to a lottery result and various effect images to improve the interest of the game. Further, there is also known a configuration in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a design or the like on a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of designs are arranged so as to circulate. However, in a gaming machine provided with a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to circulate, it may be difficult to provide a display area for effect in a wide range.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine described in the feature D0, even if it is a gaming machine having a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate, a wide range display area for performance is suitable. A game machine that can be installed can be provided. That is, the variable display unit sets each of the plurality of symbol columns configured by arranging the three-dimensional rotating bodies as one symbol row, with the three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that the plurality of symbols circulate. Each of them can be displayed in a variable manner by moving them. The variable display portion is provided in an opening formed in the game area of the game board so that a part of the plurality of spinning bodies projects forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

At the position where the plurality of symbols in the variable display portion are visible and overlap with the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies, the cross section seen from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine projects in a substantially arc shape to the front side. A display cover portion configured in a plate shape is provided. The display cover part can emit and display a predetermined image by the light when the light is emitted from a predetermined end side so that the light travels in a direction in which the plate surface of the display cover part is continuous. It has a light guide part.

A game board image display section is provided on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section of the display cover section, which is at least a part of the periphery of the opening in the game board. Since the game board image display section constitutes a part of the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section, the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side can be displayed in the light guide section. It can be displayed beyond the display range. As a result, it is possible to make the effect of the decoration images continuous in the predetermined direction side more impressive than when the decoration image is displayed using only the light guide section.

However, when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover section, a predetermined image is displayed due to the discontinuity between the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section. There is a possibility that an unnatural feeling may be given to the presentation by the decoration images that are continuous on the direction side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature D0, the decorative surface located in the opening of the gaming board in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the gaming board, and the decorative surface is viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Between the light guide and the game board image display section of the game board, there is provided a decorative surface image display section which is a part of a continuous decorative image on the predetermined direction side.

As a result, even if there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover section (light guide section), the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section are displayed. The discontinuity that occurs between and can be compensated by the decorative surface image display unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect by the decoration image that is continuous in the predetermined direction beyond the display range of the light guide unit as a suitable effect in which the unnaturalness due to the discontinuity is suppressed.

<Feature D1>
A gaming machine according to feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) provided in a direction intersecting with the game plate and the decorative surface, the side wall surface being provided between a peripheral portion of the opening of the game plate and the decorative surface;
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, and together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, a portion of the continuous decorative image. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a side wall image display section (a pattern connecting a pattern 741 and a pattern 742) that constitutes the side wall image.

In the gaming machine described in the feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting with the game board and the decorative surface is provided between the peripheral edge of the opening of the game board and the decorative surface. On the side wall surface, a side wall surface image display portion is provided between the decoration surface image display portion of the decoration surface and the image display portion of the game board. The side wall surface image display unit is configured to be a part of the decoration image that is continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the decoration surface image display unit and the game board image display unit. Therefore, the side wall image display unit can compensate for the discontinuity in the height direction due to the difference in height between the game board and the decorative surface. As a result, the continuity of the decoration images that are continuous in the predetermined direction is improved, and thus unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect of the decoration images that are continuous in the predetermined direction can be suppressed more favorably.

<Feature D2>
The gaming machine described in the feature D0 or the feature D1,
The light guide unit displays a first image (patterns 743B, 743C), which is a part of one image forming a continuous decorative image on the predetermined direction side, from the top located at the forefront of the display cover unit. In a predetermined area (areas R1 and R2) on the side, and is configured to be displayed as a part of the predetermined image,
The decorative surface image display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide unit and forms a second image together with the first image. A gaming machine including:

In the gaming machine described in the feature D2, the first image displayed on the light guide section and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display section form a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side. One image is formed. Thus, one image forming a decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction can be arranged at the boundary between the light guide portion and the decorative surface, and thus the continuity in the decorative image can be suitably increased.

In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the foremost top of the display cover unit, the height difference from the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit (decorative surface) ( The height in the front-back direction) can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the one image including the first image and the second image, and it is possible to prevent the sense of discomfort from occurring in the one image.

<Feature E0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A variable display section (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol strings, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided so as to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed,
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player and is arranged so as to face the display cover unit downward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and is operable by the player.
The operation unit is displayed in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operation possible period) during which the input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period. Emission control means (sub-control board 940) for emitting light,
A reflection portion (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined region below the top located in the forefront of the display cover portion and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operation portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening.

In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a display effect on a display device is changed, or a corresponding sound is output from a speaker or the like to perform a predetermined effect. There is also known a gaming machine (for example, see JP-A-2016-193329). There is a game machine of this type that informs the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by configuring the operation unit to emit light.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to notify the player of the operation timing of the operating section by the light emission of the operating section. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, it is difficult to recognize the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the operation unit provided below the display device. was there.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E0, in a configuration in which the player is notified of the operation time of the operation unit by the light emission of the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit is appropriately recognized by the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of playing. That is, in the game board in which the game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in front view of the game machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation execution means displays the fluctuations of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

A display cover portion is provided so as to project in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is disposed on the lower side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, facing upward. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control means and is synchronized with an operation effective period during which an input to the operation unit is effective, or a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period. Light is emitted in a predetermined color.

Here, in a predetermined region below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted from the operation portion so that the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player is provided. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation unit as the light reflected by the reflection unit. Accordingly, even when the player pays attention to the variable display section, it is difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the operation section, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

Further, since the player is informed of the operation timing of the operation unit by using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) or the like for notifying the operation time of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load, which is a point. Also in this case, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature E1>
A gaming machine according to feature E0,
The variable display section has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one of the symbol rows, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging the rotating body is arranged for each rotating body. Each of them is configured to be variable display by rotating, and a part of the plurality of turning bodies is provided so as to project forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of spinning bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is a front side. A gaming machine having a plate-like shape that projects in a substantially arc shape.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E1, the variable display section has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol strings to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. If the variation display of the symbols is a gaming machine that is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the valid operation period by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. is there. However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the rotating body in the gaming machine having the feature E1 in which the variable display of the symbols is performed by the rotating body of the rotating body.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature E1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies intersects in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided so as to project forward from the opening of the game board. A plate-shaped display cover part is provided, the cross-section of which is viewed from a predetermined direction side and which projects in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion, the light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature E2>
A gaming machine described in Feature E1,
In the opening in the game board, a predetermined display section (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature E2, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the game machine, so the predetermined display is provided. It is possible to stop the area where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflecting portion in a limited area on the rear end side of the reflecting portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. In addition, a region where the light of the light emitting unit is reflected (an image formed by the light of the light emitting unit is formed in the reflecting unit without increasing the size of the reflecting unit (that is, without increasing the forward protrusion of the display cover unit). It is possible to secure a large area on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
A game area (base body 401) having a game area in which a game ball can flow is formed on the front side and having an opening formed in the game area,
A variable display section (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol strings, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided so as to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed,
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine and is operable by the player,
A light emitting section (wave lamp 771) which is arranged on one side of the operating section and which is capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit is operated in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) during which the input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period. Emission control means (sub-control board 940) for emitting light,
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined region below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening.

In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a display effect on a display device is changed, a predetermined sound such as a corresponding sound is output from a speaker, or the like is executed. There is also known a gaming machine (for example, see JP-A-2016-193329). There is a gaming machine of this type that informs the player of the operation time of the operation unit by configuring a light emitting unit provided around the operation unit to emit light.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to notify the player of the operation timing of the operating portion by the light emission of the light emitting portion. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit provided below the display device. There was a problem that it was difficult to recognize.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F0, in the configuration in which the player is informed of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the light emitting section provided around the operation section, the operation time of the operation section It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately making the player recognize. That is, in the game board in which the game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in front view of the game machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation execution means displays the fluctuations of the plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

A display cover portion is provided so as to project in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is disposed on the lower side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, facing upward. A light emitting unit capable of emitting light is arranged on one side of the operation unit. The light-emitting unit is controlled by the light-emission control means and is synchronized with a valid operation period during which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period prior to the valid operation period and reporting the valid operation period. Is emitted in the color of.

Here, in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion that is capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light is provided. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting unit as the light reflected by the reflecting unit. Accordingly, even when the player pays attention to the variable display section, the player does not easily miss the notification of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the light emitting section, and the operation time is easily recognized.

Further, since the player is informed of the operation timing of the operation unit by using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) or the like for notifying the operation time of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load, which is a point. Also in this case, the player can be made to appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature F1>
A gaming machine according to feature F0,
The variable display section has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one of the symbol rows, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging the rotating body is arranged for each rotating body. Each of them is configured to be variable display by rotating, and a part of the plurality of turning bodies is provided so as to project forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of spinning bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view is a front side. A gaming machine having a plate-like shape that projects in a substantially arc shape.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol strings to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which the variable display of the symbols is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the operation time by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. .. However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the rotating body in the gaming machine with the characteristic F1 that displays the variable display of the rotating body of the rotating body.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a part of the plurality of spinning bodies intersects in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided so as to project forward from the opening of the game board. A plate-shaped display cover part is provided, the cross-section of which is viewed from a predetermined direction side and which projects in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the foremost top portion of the display cover portion, the light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature F2>
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
A second light emitting portion (reel side lamp 717A) capable of emitting light, provided between the rotating body and the rotating body,
The light emission control unit causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the color emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature F2, the second light emitting unit capable of emitting light is provided between the rotating bodies. The second light emitting unit emits light in the same color as the light emitting unit that emits light in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period by the light emission control unit. Therefore, not only the light reflected by the reflecting portion but also the second light emitting portion provided in the variable display portion (more specifically, between the rotating bodies) which is easily noticed by the player is notified of the operation time. Since it is performed by direct light, it is possible to suitably prevent the player from missing the notification of the operation time.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2,
The rotating body is configured to be capable of emitting light to display the design,
The game machine is characterized in that the reflector is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F3, since the reflecting portion is configured to reflect the light incident from the front side and to transmit the light incident from the rear side, it is possible to display the symbols on the rotating body by light emission. The symbols displayed by light emission can be made visible to the player through the reflecting portion. Therefore, the reflecting portion can be arranged in front of the design on the rotating body so as to be overlapped with each other, so that the size of the display cover portion can be prevented from becoming too large.

<Feature F4>
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
In the opening in the game board, a predetermined display section (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in the feature F4, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the game machine, so the predetermined display is provided. It is possible to stop the area where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflecting portion in a limited area on the rear end side of the reflecting portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. In addition, the area where the light of the light emitting section is reflected in the reflective section without increasing the size of the reflective section (that is, without increasing the projection to the front of the display cover section) (the area where an image is formed by the light of the light emitting section) ) Can be largely secured on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Characteristic G0>
A variable display section (reel device 710) capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol strings, and then the variable execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays the stopped symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
When the player operates the operation unit, at least two symbol columns (left symbol column, which can form a part of the combination of the stopped symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of symbol columns) A display area control unit (sub-control board 940) that reduces the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed by moving the position of the right symbol row), and a gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

Such a conventional pachinko machine includes a display device (display unit), and on the display device, variable display of symbols is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a final stop display of the variable display. As a result, a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine in which a variable display of symbols is performed on the display unit, as represented by the above gaming machine. For example, when the variable display pattern is displayed large, the large pattern can give the player a strong impression of the variable display, while depending on the player, the region where the variable display is performed is large with respect to the field of view. There were times when it became too difficult to see the fluctuation display.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can appropriately change the appearance of the display unit as needed. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, after the fluctuation display means displays the fluctuation of a plurality of symbol rows on the fluctuation display portion, the fluctuation display means stops and displays the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. .. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of symbols showing the first result, the game control means causes a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

An operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, a part of a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result is selected from a plurality of symbol rows. The positions of the at least two symbol rows that can be configured are moved by the display area control means, and thereby the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed is reduced. In this way, the player can reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows by operating the operation unit as necessary, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

Further, by moving the position of at least two symbol rows, the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed is reduced, so that the appearance of the at least two symbol rows is before and after the display range is reduced. There is no change in size, and it is possible to prevent these symbol strings from becoming difficult to see due to the reduced display range. In particular, the at least 2 symbol row is a symbol row that can form a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result, so the player corresponds to the first result by the at least 2 symbol row. When a part of the combination of stop symbols to be displayed is displayed, the player can appropriately visually recognize the display,
Note that "to reduce the display range" described in the feature G0 may be to reduce either the up-down direction or the left-right direction of the display range, and to reduce both the up-down direction and the left-right direction of the display range. It may be smaller.

<Characteristic G1>
A gaming machine described in feature G0,
The variable display section has a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one of the symbol rows, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging the rotating body is arranged for each rotating body. By rotating, it is configured to be able to change display respectively,
The gaming machine is
Of the plurality of spinning bodies, the first spinning body (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is played. First moving means (gear 782, 783, rack gear corresponding to the gears 782, 783) that is movable in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the machine front view,
Of the plurality of spinning bodies, a second spinning body (middle reel 711M) different from the first spinning body is movable to the rear side in the front view of the gaming machine (corresponding to the gear 781 and the gear 781). Rack gear) and
When the player operates the operation section, the display area control means moves the second-time body to a rear side of the first-time body by the second moving means, and then performs the first-time operation. A game machine characterized in that the display area of the plurality of symbol rows is reduced by moving the body by the first moving means.

In the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the variable display unit has a three-dimensional revolving body arranged so that a plurality of symbols revolves as one symbol row, and a plurality of revolving bodies including the revolving body are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol strings to be displayed is configured to be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

Of the plurality of turning bodies, the first turning body corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is viewed from the front of the gaming machine by the first moving means. It is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction intersecting with the front-rear direction. On the other hand, among the plurality of rotating bodies, the second rotating body different from the first rotating body is configured to be movable to the rear side in the front view of the gaming machine by the second moving means.

When the operation unit is operated by the player, the display area control unit moves the second body to the rear side of the first body by the second moving unit, and then the first body is moved to the first body. 1 Moved by moving means. This makes it possible to reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Characteristic G2>
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
The first turning body is a turning body located at least at both ends of the plurality of turning bodies,
The first moving means is configured to be movable by substantially the same distance in a direction in which the second turning bodies located at both ends of the plurality of turning bodies are brought closer to each other.

In the gaming machine described in the feature G2, when the operation section is operated by the player, the second rotating bodies located at both ends of the plurality of rotating bodies are substantially moved in the direction in which they are brought closer to each other by the first moving means. They are moved the same distance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the centers of the display areas of the plurality of symbol rows from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the line of sight of the player when viewing the variable display of the symbols due to the reduction of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Characteristic H0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the game machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) intersecting the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or in a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be visible from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
A first mounting portion (projection) that is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated and that allows displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide curved portion. Part 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, a projection 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
A second mounting portion (projection portion) that is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and that does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first mounting portion. 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, protrusions 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, protrusions 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, protrusions 854B, through holes 862B, 852B). Machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from the end face in the game area (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion), instead of the flat light guide plate, may have a problem at the time of assembly when being unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a luminescent manner with good appearance. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are misaligned and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H0, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the unit including the light guide member having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. It is possible to display a predetermined image without the need. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light-guiding member to be visually displayed from the front side.

Here, the first mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, is configured to allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide curved portion. Has been done. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, the displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to the deformation is allowed by the first mounting portion, so The manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed by allowing a great variation in manufacturing the light guide member along the continuous direction.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first mounting portion. It is configured. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with little manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed aesthetically. It can be possible.

<Characteristic H1>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the game machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) intersecting the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or in a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be visible from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
In the part used when the light guide member and the cover part are integrated, the predetermined continuous direction has a larger allowable positioning range than the crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction. A first mounting portion (projection portion 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, projection portion 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B);
A second mounting portion that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and is set to have a smaller allowable positioning range in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion. (Projection 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, projection 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, projection 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, projection 854B, through holes 862B, 852B) And a gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from the end face in the game area (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion), instead of the flat light guide plate, may have a problem at the time of assembly when being unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a luminescent manner with good appearance. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are misaligned and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H1, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the unit including the light guide member having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. It is possible to display a predetermined image without the need. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light-guiding member to be visually displayed from the front side.

Here, the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, has an allowable positioning range in a predetermined continuous direction than in an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. Is set to a large value. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, the allowable range of positioning in the continuous direction along the predetermined continuous direction is set to be relatively large by the first mounting portion. Therefore, it is possible to largely allow the manufacturing variation of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction and suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, is set to have a positioning allowable range in a predetermined continuous direction smaller than that of the first mounting portion. ing. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with little manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed aesthetically. It can be possible.

<Characteristic H2>
The gaming machine described in the feature H0 or the feature H1,
The first mounting portion,
A first support portion (projection portion 892, 893) projectingly provided on the back side of the flat surface portion of the cover portion that is continuous with the cover curved portion, or at a predetermined position on the front side of the light source unit;
A first hole formed in the light source unit or the cover so that the first support part can be inserted therethrough, wherein the predetermined continuous direction is formed longer than an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. A gaming machine comprising one hole portion (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B).

In the gaming machine described in the feature H2, the first mounting portion is the first support portion projecting at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat surface portion of the cover portion that is continuous with the cover curving portion or on the front side of the light source unit. A first hole through which the light source unit can be inserted is provided in the light source unit or the cover. The first hole portion is formed so that the predetermined continuous direction is longer than the intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. Therefore, the predetermined mounting direction of the first mounting portion can have a larger positioning allowable range than the crossing direction, and a predetermined continuous direction (direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous) accompanying the deformation of the light guide bending portion. Can be configured to allow displacement along.

<Characteristic H3>
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The second mounting portion is
The second hole portions are respectively provided on both ends of the light guide member in the intersecting direction, and the length in the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length in the continuous direction in the first hole portion. Formed second hole portions (through holes 861A, 861B, through holes 862A, 862B),
A second support portion (projections 844A, 844B, projections 854A, 854B) formed in the light source unit so as to be insertable into the second hole;
The length of the second hole portion (through holes 861B, 862B) provided on one side of the intersecting direction in the intersecting direction is equal to the length of the second hole portion (projecting portion 844A) provided on the other side of the intersecting direction. , 854A) is formed longer than the length in the intersecting direction.

In the gaming machine described in the feature H3, the second mounting portion has the second hole portions provided at both ends of the light guide member in the intersecting direction, and the light source that can be inserted into the second hole portion. And a second support portion provided in the unit. Each of the second hole portions provided on both ends in the intersecting direction is formed such that the length in the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length in the predetermined continuous direction in the first hole portion. Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the second mounting portion in the predetermined continuous direction can be set smaller than that of the first mounting portion, and the predetermined mounting direction (direction in which the plate surface is continuous) is greater than that of the first mounting portion. Can be configured to disallow displacement along.

Further, of the second hole portions provided on both ends of the intersecting direction, the length of the second hole portion provided on one side of the intersecting direction in the intersecting direction is equal to the other side of the intersecting direction. Since it is formed longer than the length of the second hole provided in the intersecting direction, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the installation position of the second hole provided on each end of the intersecting direction. Manufacturing error can be absorbed in the cross direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing error in the position of the second hole from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source unit in the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the light guide member.

<Characteristic H4>
The gaming machine according to any one of features H0 to H3,
A curved holding portion (holding member 811) capable of holding the light guide curved portion that overlaps the rear side of the cover curved portion while being pressed against the cover curved portion along the cover curved portion,
The light guide member is configured to be integrated with the cover portion by the first attachment portion after the light guide curved portion is held by the bend holding portion. Machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature H4, the light guide member is configured such that the light guide curved portion overlapped on the rear side of the cover curved portion is curved by the curved holding portion before being integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion. The cover curved portion is held while being pressed along the cover curved portion. Therefore, when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed by a certain amount or more due to manufacturing variations or the like, the shape of the light guide curved portion is corrected to the shape of the cover curved portion by the curved holding portion, and It is possible to integrate the light guide member and the cover with the single mounting portion. Therefore, it is possible to correct the shape of the light guide curved portion within a certain range while allowing a large variation in manufacturing the light guide member including the light guide curved portion, and a predetermined image using the light guide member looks good. It can be displayed well.

<Characteristic H5>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so as to be visible from the front side, and the cross section viewed from the predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the game machine front view is the front side. A light guide member having a plate-like (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that is curved and protrudes, and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) intersecting the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or in a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (design 743) on at least the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least the front side of the light guide curved portion, and has the light transmittance that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be visible from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion,
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member,
When one of the light source unit and the cover part is integrated with the other, a mounting part (through holes 841A, 841B) that allows positioning of the other in a direction along the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other. , 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is integrated with the cover part via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover part with the mounting part.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from the end face in the game area (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion), instead of the flat light guide plate, may have a problem at the time of assembly when being unitized. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured into a shape as designed, there is a possibility that a predetermined design cannot be displayed in a luminescent manner with good appearance. On the other hand, if the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion is reduced and it is attempted to be manufactured with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost of the game machine increases. Further, if excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, there is a possibility that the light source and the light guide member are misaligned and the light guide function is impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H5, it is possible to provide the gaming machine in which the unit including the light guide member having the curved portion can be suitably assembled. That is, at a position where a predetermined structure is visible from the front side and overlaps with the front side of the structure portion, a cross section seen from a predetermined direction side that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes to the front side. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is capable of displaying a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion by the light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated in front of the predetermined structure. It is possible to display a predetermined image without the need. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height or posture, the position at which a predetermined image is overlapped and displayed on the front side of a predetermined structure may be significantly displaced. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, at least on the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, a cover portion having a curved cover curved portion along the light guide curved portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property that allows a predetermined image displayed on the light-guiding member to be visually displayed from the front side.

Here, since the light guide member is integrated with the cover part through the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover part, it is possible to previously integrate the light source unit with the light guide member. The position of the light source with respect to the light guide member can be appropriately adjusted.

Further, when one of the light source unit and the cover part is integrated with the other, the mounting part is configured to allow positioning in the direction along the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other within a predetermined range. There is. Therefore, even when the light guide curved portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, when the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit, a predetermined continuous direction is required. Since the mounting error is absorbed by the mounting portion, the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed by allowing a large variation in manufacturing the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction.

<Characteristic J0>
A predetermined end portion side (so as to allow the light to travel along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) by light when light is incident from the end faces 715B4, 715B5),
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means partially travels as weak light or travels, or is a light guide including a predetermined direction (regions D1 and D2) in which the light does not travel. And means (recess Z),
The light guide means is arranged so as to shine more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by guiding light from a light emitting means.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from the end face in the game area (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine having the feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a variety of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light advances in a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

In addition, the light guide means allows the light that has entered the light guide member from the light emitting means to partially travel as weak light or travel, or become light guide including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel. For this reason, the light guide means has a portion that shines more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Can be provided. Accordingly, the light guide member can be made to illuminate in a random manner instead of being uniform, so that a variety of image display modes by the light guide member can be realized.

Note that the predetermined image in the feature J0 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Characteristic J1>
A predetermined end portion side (so as to allow the light to travel along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) by light when light is incident from the end faces 715B4, 715B5),
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions (arrow F1 direction, arrow F2 direction, and arrow F3 direction) and travels in the light guide member, and the separated light in each direction. A light guide means (recessed portion Z) configured to form a region (regions D1 and D2) which is weaker than the light or which the light does not reach between the game machine. ..

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a player enters a starting opening provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the entered ball, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered. It is known that a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine has been known in which the production is diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from the end face in the game area (for example, JP-A-2015-80625). ).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as an LED, and the variation in the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a variety of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light advances in a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

Further, the light guide means separates the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means into at least two directions and advances in the light guide member, and the light in each separated direction is weaker than the light. Alternatively, a region where the light does not reach can be formed. Accordingly, the light guide member can be made to illuminate in a random manner instead of being uniform, so that a variety of image display modes by the light guide member can be realized.

Note that the predetermined image in the feature J1 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Characteristic J2>
The gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
The light guide means includes two or more sides (sides Z1, Z2, Z3) formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the side of the predetermined end portion, and light from the light source among the two or more sides. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a recess provided with a top portion (left end C1, right end C2) formed by two adjacent sides having different angles with the output direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature J1, the light guide means is at least two sides formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the side of the predetermined end portion, and among the two or more sides, a light source is used. Since it is a concave portion having a top portion formed by two adjacent sides having different angles formed with the output direction of light, it is possible to process the shape of the end portion of the light guiding member by processing the end portion of the light guiding member without attaching a dedicated component. The way the light shines can be random.

Note that at least one feature described in Features 10 to J2 may be applied in combination with any other feature or multiple features. Below, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned respective features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operation means, and a passage part for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in a game area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating drum type game machines such as slot machines: The rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is responsive to the design after the stop. A gaming machine that gives benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100... Gaming machine, 261... Press operation device, 263... Selection operation device, 479... Decorative symbol display device, 710... Reel device, 711L... Left reel, 711M... Middle reel, 711R... Right reel, 712... Main symbol, 713B ...Second sub-pattern, 730...lottery result display device, 920...main control board, 940...sub-control board, 401...base body, 701...base body, 702...side wall portion, 715...resin cover, 715A...outer cover, 715A1... Curved part, 715B... Light guide plate, 715B1... Curved part, 715B4, 715B5... End face, 717A... Reel side lamp, 720... Hold lamp, 741, 742, 743... Picture, 753... Information display part, 761A, 761B... Half mirror , 771... Wave lamp, 781, 782, 783... Gear, 1441A, 1441B... Start prize winning switch, 1610... Entrance, 1612... Guide passage, 1613A, 1613B... First passage, 1614A, 1614B... Second passage, 1631... 1 rear side part, 2nd rear side part, 1631A, 1631B... passage wall part, 811... pressing member, 812, 813... light source unit, 824, 834... light emitting means, 892, 893... projection part, 841A, 841B, 843A , 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B... Through hole, 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B... Projection part, 842A, 842B, 852A, 852B... Through hole, 861A, 861B, 862A, 862B... ... area, Z... recessed parts Z1, Z2, Z3... side, C1... left end of side Z1, C2... right end of side Z1

Claims (2)

A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction. When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident from the light emitting means to the light guide member partially travels as weak light or travels, or a light guide means for guiding light including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel,
The light guide means shines more strongly than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other side around the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Which guides light from the light emitting means ,
The light guide member is provided with a flat surface portion provided with the predetermined end portion, and a pattern which is provided at a position farther from the predetermined end portion than the flat surface portion and which is capable of emitting light by the light output from the light emitting means. Has a curved portion,
A game machine characterized in that a pattern provided on the curved portion is configured to be capable of emitting light by light output from the light emitting means . A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction. When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the side of the predetermined end of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions and travels in the light guide member, and the light in each separated direction emits light weaker than the light, or the light. A light guide means configured to form a region that is out of reach ,
The light guide member is provided with a flat surface portion provided with the predetermined end portion, and a pattern which is provided at a position farther from the predetermined end portion than the flat surface portion and which is capable of emitting light by the light output from the light emitting means. Has a curved portion,
A game machine characterized in that a pattern provided on the curved portion is configured to be capable of emitting light by light output from the light emitting means .